home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1995-09-09 | 541.4 KB | 11,547 lines |
- Chapter 1 - General information
- =================================================================
-
- 1.1 General information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Welcome to Concord. You are now reading the manual for one of the
- most flexible bulletin board systems around. Development of this
- product started in December 1993, when Aki Antman decided, due
- to his service in the Finnish army, not to develop SuperBBS any
- further, or at least not in the near future. Pasi Talliniemi did
- not want to wait for a new release of SuperBBS and decided to
- start writing his own BBS software.
-
- After only 4 month of programming, the first BETA release was
- available and send out to the BETA test sites. It was not a
- finished product, but it was running. It normally takes a lot
- longer than 4 month to get a complete BBS program up and running
- from scratch, but Pasi did it and his software included options
- and a flexibility not found in any other BBS package, shareware
- or commercial. The testing period for the BETA sites took a long
- time, but the product needed to be running well, before it could
- be released. And then Pasi had to go in the Finnish army, which
- reduced programming time from 10 hours a day to 2 hours a day.
- | But in december 1994, just before Christmas, the first Gamma
- | version was released as a public test version. And the first
- | external utilities came available which could work directly with
- | Concord. You are now reading the documentation for the second
- | GAMMA release.
-
- Development for Concord is still going on. Don't think that this
- what you have here is the final product. Many options still have
- to be added, others have to be expanded and some changed. This
- is only the second gamma release of Concord. Many others will
- follow.
-
- This documentation is written after release of the last BETA or
- GAMMA version and before the official shareware release. This
- could mean that you can find differences between the
- documentation and the BBS program and/or it's specific utilities.
- This documentation will only be updated for every official
- shareware release. BETA and GAMMA releases will have a separate
- 'What's new' file included.
-
- Please note that English is not my native language. The
- | documentation is written in WordPerfect and the UK English
- spelling checker has been used, but that doesn't mean there are
- | no strange things in this manual. Language used in this manual
- | is 'English' english, not 'American' english.
-
- Take your time to read through this documentation. Concord is
- very powerful and has many options. This documentation will try
- to explain the options and how to use them. This documentation
- is NOT a complete guide on how to run Concord in every possible
- way. That's something you have to find out for yourself.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 1
-
- An international FidoNet echomail link called CONCORD has been
- set up and is available to most countries. If you have problems,
- questions, remarks or anything else about Concord and/or the
- specific utilities, please search for this area on a BBS near
- you. All Concord support sites will have this echo available to
- | you. Most countries will have national echomail areas available
- | for Concord support, so look for them at your support site. In
- | Holland this area is called CONCORD.028 for example.
- |
- | A separate file area network is established to spread utilities
- | for Concord around. Keep in touch with the support sites for the
- | files that support Concord.
- |
- | Concord is compiled with Borland Pascal 7.01 and contains over
- | 85.000 lines of source code.
-
- 1.2 Copyrights
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord and the specific utilities are protected under the
- copyright laws of Finland and other countries.
-
- Concord program and specific utilities are copyrighted by:
-
- Pasi Talliniemi (C) 1993-1995
-
- The documentation is protected by copyright laws of the
- Netherlands and other countries.
-
- Concord documentation is copyrighted by:
-
- Frank Hemmelder (C) 1994-1995
-
- Jamm message base format is copyrighted by:
-
- JAM(mbp) - Copyright 1993 Joaquim Homrighausen
- Andrew Milner
- Mats Birch
- Mats Wallin
- ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
-
- 1.3 Disclaimer
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate
- information. However the writer assumes no responsibility for its
- use, nor for any infringement of the intellectual property rights
- of third parties which could result from such use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 2
-
- The author of Concord and/or it's specific utilities is NEVER
- responsible for any damage which may result from using this
- software. The only guarantee you have is that the programs will
- take up space on your harddisk. It has been thoroughly tested on
- | many different systems with many different settings, but that
- doesn't mean it should work for you. If it destroys your harddisk
- or kills your cat, that is your problem. Use the software at your
- own risk. Every possible action has been taken to make the
- software as stabile as possible.
-
- Concord may not be used in any UNLAWFUL manner or illegal
- activity. If this happen, local authorities will be informed.
- Please report any illegal versions or software cracks of the
- programs to the support sites.
-
- You are not allowed to modify, patch, disassemble (or anything
- else like that) Concord and/or it's specific utilities in any way
- without written permission from the copyright holder.
-
- You are not allowed to ship Concord and/or the specific utilities
- or part of these programs, in other software and/or hardware
- packages without the written permission from the copyright
- holder.
-
- You are not allowed to patch Concord in an unregistered version
- to make it appear registered. Only the official registration key
- is allowed to change a Concord version from unregistered to
- registered.
-
- You are not allowed to translate, print (other than for personal
- use), change or sell this documentation without the written
- permission from the copyright holder.
-
- Sysops of Bulletin Boards are allowed to post the Concord
- software package for download to their users in an unmodified
- version and as long as no charge is asked for downloading the
- software.
-
- Sysops are not allowed to add BBS commercials to the software
- archive. The use of a ARJ header is however allowed.
-
- Sysops should make it possible for all their users to freely
- download the Concord software package if requested by the user.
-
- Sysops are NOT allowed to change the archive method of the
- software package, because this will make the installation program
- useless. The installation program needs the archive in the ARJ
- format.
-
- The author does not guarantee any new versions of this software.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 3
-
- 1.4 Addresses
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- How to get in touch with the author:
-
- Pasi Talliniemi
-
- BBS : El Paso
- | Phone number : +358-0-2903463 V.FC
- | +358-0-8788184 V32Bis
- Node number : 2:220/297
- Mail address : Pasi Talliniemi
- Tiilitie 3
- SF-05200 Rajamäki
- Finland
- Internet : pasi.talliniemi@helsinki.fi
-
- How to get in touch with the documentation writer:
-
- Frank Hemmelder
-
- | BBS : NNN (Concord)BBS
- Phone number : +31-188059592 V32bis
- Node number : 2:2802/169
- Mail address : Frank Hemmelder
- P.O. Box 270
- 3200 AG Spijkenisse
- The Netherlands
- CompuServe : 100341.2333
-
- | The phonenumber will change in october 1995, because the whole
- | Dutch phone system is changed than. Please consult your local
- | phone company for more information.
-
- 1.5 Support
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- If you need support in setting up and running Concord, contact
- the support sites. A separate list is included in this archive
- with all current support and registration nodes. If there is no
- support site in your country, contact one in a nearby country.
- Support is given to all users of Concord, registered or
- unregistered.
-
- If there is no support and/or registration in your country and
- you would like to become one, contact the following people:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 4
-
- For all zones except zone 2 (= Europe):
-
- Len Morgan
-
- BBS : QST BBS
- | Phone number : +1-916-920-1288 HST/DS V.Everything
- | +1-916-922-1288 HST/DS 14.4
- Node number : 1:203/730
- 1:203/731
- Mail address : Len Morgan
- Zone 1 & 4 Reg/Supt Site Coordinator
- P.O. Box 13965
- Sacramento, California 95853-3965
- U.S.A.
- Extra info : Credit Cards (VISA/MC) accepted
- | Internet : Len.Morgan@730.gigo.com
-
- For zone 2:
-
- Ralf Ulbrich
-
- BBS : Mustang BBS, Nuernberg
- Phone number : +49-911-500840 28.8k V.FC
- +49-911-505893 19.2k ZyXel
- +49-911-505667 14.4k HST Dual
- Node number : 2:2490/2003
- 2:2490/2002
- 2:2490/2001
- Mail address : Ralf Ulbrich
- Postfach 100 331
- 90565 Schwaig, Germany
-
- If you have complaints about other registration and/or support
- nodes, please contact the people above, depending on which zone
- you are in.
-
- 1.6 Registration
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord will be available as Shareware. This means you will have
- | to register after the 90 days trail period. Contact the
- registration sites when you're ready to register or contact Len
- Morgan or Ralf Ulbrich. (See addresses above.)
-
- | All registrations will be valid until release v1.99, which is a
- | long way off and even then it is not sure that there will be an
- | upgrade fee.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 5
-
- | 1.6.1 Prices
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | Here is a list with prices in US Dollars. Note that the prices
- | may differ when registering outside the USA, because of
- | conversion costs. Most registration sites only allow
- | registrations in their national currency.
- |
- | Quantity Type of order Price (US$)
- | ----------- -------------------------------- -----------
- | 1 Non Commercial $ 70.00
- | 2 - 10 Non Commercial 63.00
- | 10+ Non Commercial 56.00
- | 1 Commercial 100.00
- | 2 - 10 Commercial 90.00
- | 10+ Commercial 80.00
- | 1 Prior registered SuperBBS Sysop 50.00
- |
- | Non commercial : Any amateur BBS system, not operating
- | for the primary purpose of renumeration
- | or profit, who's sole purpose is to
- | offer a free service to it's users.
- | This includes any BBS system that
- | accepts contribution, however, does not
- | refuse usage without such
- | contributions.
- | Commercial : Any BBS system who's sole purpose is to
- | operate for profit or renumeration and
- | requiring membership fee's before
- | admission. Any BBS system operated by
- | and for Government or any Government
- | Sponsored Agencies, not open to the
- | General Public.
- | SuperBBS Sysop : Registered SuperBBS Sysops must provide
- | proof of registration by supplying BBS
- | name, Sysop name and Registration key
- | code.
- |
- | 1.6.2 Registered SuperBBS Sysops
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | Registered SuperBBS Sysops will receive a discount when
- | registering Concord. You will have to supply your registration
- | information to the registration site. This information will be
- | checked with the database of registered SuperBBS Sysops. If you
- | are in there, you will receive the discount. This database is
- | maintained by Len Morgan.
- |
- | Registration cost : US$ 50 (Reg. SuperBBS Sysops)
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 6
-
- | This discount has the following reason:
- |
- | Concord was conceived as a result of SuperBBS. Many of the fine
- | features attracted all of us to SuperBBS and Pasi wished to
- | continue with the flexibility of SuperBBS, with many other ideas
- | that would take BBSing further into the future. Our customer base
- | was aimed at the orphaned SuperBBS customers, who were very
- | faithful and dedicated to the software.
- |
- | 1.6.3 Registration information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- When registering, you will need to supply the following
- information:
-
- | - Sysop name for key
- | - BBS name for key
-
- - Your real name
- - Your full address including country
- - Your full (international) voice and data phone numbers
- - Your FidoNet address
- - On-line hours
- - Version of Concord software
-
- Please note that the Sysop name and BBS name are case sensitive.
- That means that capitals and lower case characters are different.
- For example: 'Concord' is different from 'CONCORD'.
-
- Keys will be generated after you're money has been received. This
- can take some time in some countries, so please be patient.
-
- | 1.6.4 Registration changes
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Registration changes for Sysop names are not available, however,
- keys may be reissued for legal name changes resulting from
- adoption, divorce, or any other court authorized name change.
-
- All registration sites are permitted to charge users a US$ 5
- charge for the handling of reissue keys.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 1 - Page 7
-
- Chapter 2 - Installation
- =================================================================
-
- 2.1 General information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- | This chapter will describe the installation of Concord. All
- available options will be explained and examples will be given.
- Note that due to the fact that this piece of software is very
- flexible, it is not possible to explain every possible variation
- in setting up your bulletin board. This manual explains the
- basics, the rest is for your own imagination to find out.
-
- Concord comes with an installation program. This should help you
- set up a new system or help you convert from a SuperBBS system
- configuration.
-
- | If you received a file with the extension other than ARJ, you
- | have not an original archive. The original archive is in ARJ
- | format, otherwise the installation program will not work. Please
- | report any archive conversions to the support sites.
-
- | 2.2 Hardware and software requirements
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord requires the following minimum system options:
-
- | - 80286 or higher processor. (Min. 386DX suggested)
- - Harddisk with at least 2 MB free
- - 500 KB free conventional memory
- - Hayes compatible modem
-
- When running Concord in a multiline system with Desqview, Windows
- | or any other multi-tasker, a 80486SX with 4 MB memory is
- recommended.
-
- Concord requires the following software:
-
- - MS-Dos or any MS-Dos like box in Windows or OS/2.
- - SHARE.EXE (supplied with MS-Dos)
- | - Files=60 statement in CONFIG.SYS file
- - Fullscreen editor, like Gedit, Quicked or Toped
- - ANSI drawing package, like A3E or Thedraw
- - Transfer protocol, like CEXYZ, DSZ or HS/Link
- | - Fossil driver, like BNU or X00
- | - Compression software, like ARJ and PK(UN)ZIP
- |
- | Optionally you might need a mailer if you want to connect your
- | BBS up to a network, like FidoNet.
-
- Concord has been tested with and requires MS-Dos versions 3.3 and
- higher. Version 6.x of MS-Dos is recommended. Concord has also
- | been tested running under Windows (including Beta-2 M7 of Windows
- | 95) and OS/2 (including OS/2 Warp).
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 1
-
- Please note that most full-screen editors, transfer protocols and
- ANSI drawing packages are shareware programs and when you use
- these for periods longer then 30 days, you should also register
- these programs.
-
- | 2.3 Before you begin
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | Please do the following steps before you start installing
- | Concord, otherwise some parts of the installation might not go
- | as planned.
- |
- | Load SHARE in your AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS file with either:
- |
- | - CONFIG.SYS: DEVICE=C:\DOS\SHARE.EXE
- | - AUTOEXEC.BAT: C:\DOS\SHARE
- |
- | OS/2 users can skip this, because SHARE is always loaded.
- |
- | Check you CONFIG.SYS file for the FILES= statement. There should
- | be at least a FILES=40 statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, but
- | preferably higher.
- |
- | Add the Concord environment variable to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
- | This line should read something like:
- |
- | - AUTOEXEC.BAT: SET CONCORD=C:\CONCORD\
- |
- | Note that there are no spaces allowed around the = character.
- |
- | When all these steps are performed, reboot your system.
-
- 2.4 Unpacking the software
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Make a temporary directory where you can unpack the main Concord
- archive. When you unpack the archive you received, you should
- have the following files:
-
- - CONCORD.ARJ
- - INSTALL.EXE
- | - CONCORD.DOC
- |
- | The archive will also contain some textfiles, but the above files
- | are the ones you need to do the installation.
-
- The ARJ files contains all the files needed to set up and run
- Concord, except for the programs mentioned in 2.3, like the
- | fullscreen editor, the transfer protocol and ANSI drawing
- package.
-
- Make sure you have the ARJ utility in the current directory or
- in your PATH. Now you are ready to start the installation.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 2
-
- 2.5 Configuring Concord
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- There are 2 ways of setting up Concord. One is starting from
- scratch, the other one is converting from an existing SuperBBS
- configuration. First we will discuss the installation from
- scratch. Later we will discuss the conversion from SuperBBS to
- Concord.
-
- 2.6 New configuration
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Start the installation program INSTALL.EXE from your temporary
- directory. You will be greeted by a screen informing you about
- the hardware and software requirements for Concord, a warranty
- and disclaimer and a list of available keys during the
- installation.
-
- These keys are:
-
- | F1 Read the manual (Only if the documentation file
- | is installed.)
- Alt-J Shell to Operating System
- ENTER Continue installation
- ESC Abort installation
- SPACE Change settings
-
- If you don't want to continue with the installation, press ESC,
- otherwise press ENTER.
-
- Now the screen with the installation settings appear. Here you
- can change the location where Concord is installed and if it is
- a new configuration or a conversion from a SuperBBS system. If
- you want to change some of the settings, press the SPACE bar. You
- can then change to the desired option by using the cursor keys.
- Press ESC when finished.
-
- If you entered a directory which does not exist, Concord will ask
- you if you want to create it. Concord will check the available
- diskspace on the destination drive and if the ARJ utility is
- found. Press ENTER when there are no errors found to continue the
- installation.
-
- Concord will now install the software in the directories needed.
- This can take some time depending on your system speed. When all
- files have been installed you will be shown a warning screen,
- informing you that you have to make the necessary changes to the
- settings. Remember, you can press F1 anytime to view the manual.
-
- After pressing ENTER, the installation program will call the
- configuration program CSETUP.EXE.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 3
-
- 2.7 Configuration program
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- In this part of the configuration program you will find the
- following options and sub options:
-
- General
- System information
- Modem settings
- Paths
- Message system
- File system
- User config
- Net addresses
- Limits
- Events
- Transfer protocols
- File archivers
- FS message editors
- Char sets
- Keyboard macros
- Other settings
- Msg areas
- File areas
- Doors
- Lng files
- Quit
-
- You can move between the different main options with the cursor
- keys. Press ENTER to display the sub-options or configuration
- screens. Press ESC to return from the sub-options.
-
- 2.7.1 General
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This is the main configuration group. Underneath this main group
- name you will find almost every setting for the Concord BBS.
-
- 2.7.1.1 System information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Here you can enter the general information of your BBS system.
-
- Option : BBS name
- Description : Name of your BBS. This will have to be the
- same as in your registration, otherwise
- Concord will not work. Note that this line
- is case sensitive.
- Example : NNN (Concord)BBS
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 4
-
- Option : Sysop name
- Description : Name of the Sysop. This will have to be the
- same as in your registration, otherwise
- Concord will not work. Note that this line
- is case sensitive.
- Example : Frank Hemmelder
-
- Option : Asst sysop
- Description : Name of the Co-Sysop. This name will be used
- in the chat function of the BBS. See chat
- menu option for more information.
- Example : Peter Jongma
-
- Option : Location
- Description : Location of your BBS system. Here you can
- enter where your BBS is located.
- Example : Spijkenisse, The Netherlands
-
- Option : Phone number
- Description : Your DATA phone number.
- Example : +31.188059592
-
- Option : BBSID (I)
- Description : Filename for QWK/BlueWave packets. Your
- off-line mail packets for your users will be
- called as defined in this option. It is
- important to change this to something that
- is specific for your system, so your mail
- packets can not get confused with any other
- BBS in your area. You can use any character
- allowed by MS-Dos for filenames.
- Example : NNNBBS
-
- Option : BBSID (II)
- Description : Filename for Omen packets. Your off-line
- Omen mail packets for your users will be
- called as defined in this option. It is
- important to change this to something that
- is specific for your system, so your mail
- packets can not get confused with any other
- BBS in your area. You can use any character
- allowed by MS-Dos for filenames.
- Example : NB
-
- 2.7.1.2 Modem settings
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This screen allows you to enter the information for your modem.
- If you are running a front-end mailer, this page is less
- interesting, because your mailer will handle all modem commands.
-
- The modem settings are grouped in two parts, the commands you
- need most of the time and the special commands. Pressing F10 will
- bring up the special modem commands menu.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 5
-
- Please consult your modem manual when you are not sure about some
- of the options mentioned below. If you still can't figure out
- what the meaning of the command is, contact a Concord Support
- site or use the CONCORD echomail area.
-
- Type : COM port
- Description : Port to use for your modem. This can be
- COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.
- Choices : 1,2,3 or 4
-
- Type : Init rate
- Description : The maximum speed of your modem. If you have
- a 2400 Bps modem, this will be 2400. You
- might have to lock the speed between your
- modem and your PC when using a modem at
- | higher speeds, this is normally only done
- | with modemspeeds above 4800 Bps, and you
- might have to install a NS16550AFN chip,
- instead of the 16450 on your communication
- card. Please consult a computertechnician if
- you are unfamiliar with replacing chips in
- your computer. When done wrong, you could
- damage your computer.
- Choices : Modem speed
-
- Option : Init string
- Description : String sent to the modem to initialize the
- modem. This string can vary from modem to
- modem. There is no general rule here.
- Consult the CONCORD mail area if you are
- having trouble finding the right init
- string.
- Example : ATS0=1&C1&D2|
-
- Option : Locked BPS rate
- Description : When using a high-speed modem, it is mostly
- necessary to lock the communication speed
- between your computer and your modem. This
- is independent from the connect speed of
- your modem. Normally you need to set the
- locked BPS rate to the fastest speed
- available on your modem. Note that you might
- have to replace your 16450 chip on your
- communication card with a chip that uses
- FIFO's, like the NS16550AFN chip, when
- locking the speed at 38400 Bps. Some
- computers cannot handle this speed over
- there COM port. Consult your modem manual
- for more information.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 6
-
- Now for the special modem commands. Press F10 to access this menu
- and change the items that are not correct for your modem.
-
- Option : Init tries
- Description : Number of times Concord will try to initiate
- your modem. If your modem does not
- initialize, Concord will return to DOS with
- an error message.
- Example : 3
-
- Option : On hook
- Description : String sent to the modem to place it
- 'on-hook'. This means if you call in, the
- modem will answer the phone. The pipe (|)
- symbol means a carriage return.
- Example : ATH0|
-
- Option : Off hook
- Description : String sent to the modem to place it
- 'off-hook'. This means if you call in, the
- modem will not answer the phone and you will
- hear a busy signal. Please note that it is
- illegal in some countries to switch a modem
- off hook.
- Example : ATH1|
-
- Option : Reset
- Description : String sent to the modem to reset it to its
- default settings. This is ATZ for most
- modems.
- Example : ATZ|
-
- Option : No carrier
- Description : Response from the modem when there is no
- carrier when you try to call out. Your modem
- must be configured in such a way that it
- gives 'word like' responses, otherwise you
- will have to change many options in these
- configuration screens.
- Example : NO CARRIER|
-
- Option : Answer
- Description : String sent to the modem to answer the
- phone. In most cases this is ATA.
- Example : ATA|
-
- Option : ... from
- Description : Starting time for Concord to answer the
- phone. You can use this in conjunction with
- the following option to restrict access to
- the BBS on certain hours. Time is entered in
- the 24 hour format.
- Example : 00:00
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 7
-
- Option : ... to
- Description : Ending time for Concord to answer the phone.
- You can use this in conjunction with the
- previous option to restrict access to the
- BBS on certain hours. Time is entered in the
- 24 hour format.
- Example : 24:00
-
- Option : Flush w/ slow
- Description : Flush the buffer after each write with slow
- modems, that is modem speeds equal or slower
- then 2400 Bps.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Wait response slow
- Description : Time to wait in 1/10th of a second after
- sending IEMSI/ANSI request. This may prevent
- wrong IEMSI logons. This setting is for 2400
- Bps and slower.
- Example : 15
-
- Option : Wait response fast
- Description : Time to wait in 1/10th of a second after
- sending IEMSI/ANSI request. This may prevent
- wrong IEMSI logons. This setting is for
- speeds above 2400 Bps.
- Example : 5
-
- Option : Manual answer
- Description : Let Concord answer the phone when a RING is
- detected or let the modem answer the phone.
- The first method uses the ATA command, the
- second is set by the S0=0 line in your modem
- configuration.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Lower DTR when busy
- | Description : When Concord is working, for example doing
- | maintenance, it is possible to switch the
- modem off-hook. This can be done by lowering
- DTR, preventing the modem from answering the
- | phone. In some countries it is illegal to
- | place the modem in this operating status.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Lower DTR to hangup
- Description : When Concord is hanging up the phone, after
- a user is logged off, it can lower DTR to
- disconnect or sent the escape string. With
- some modems, lowering DTR is not working to
- disconnect.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 8
-
- Option : OK
- Description : String received from the modem when the
- modem is initialized. In most cases this is
- OK.
- Example : OK|
-
- Option : Ring
- Description : String received from the modem when somebody
- is calling in. The RING will tell Concord to
- pick up the phone if answering is enabled.
- Example : RING|
-
- Option : Escape code
- Description : String sent to the modem to let the modem
- return to command mode. When this string is
- sent, the modem will disconnect and return
- to command mode. You might have to add a
- delay to this command for some modems. The
- symbol '~' is used as the delay character
- with most modems.
- Example : ~~~+++~~~
-
- Option : Init delay
- Description : Time delay between the initialization tries.
- Concord will wait the defined time before
- trying to initialize the modem again.
- Example : 10
-
- Option : No hangup
- Description : Force a Carrier Detect (CD) even when there
- is an error or out of time problem with the
- modem. You would normally leave this to No.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Escape delay
- Description : The delay in 1/10th of a second before and
- after an escape sequence. This is useful for
- slow modems.
- Example : 5
-
- | Option : x Base addr
- | Description : Special COM port base address for direct
- | async routines. Use this only if you use
- | strange COM port settings.
- | Example : $3F8
- |
- | Option : x IRQ
- | Description : Special COM port IRQ number for direct async
- | routines. Use this only if you use strange
- | COM port settings.
- | Example : 2
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 9
-
- 2.7.1.2 Modem responses
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- When you press the F10 key in the modem settings screen, another
- window will appear. In this window you can specify the different
- connect strings for your modem. Any connect string is possible,
- even for your fax option.
-
- You can add a new connect string with ALT-A combination. Adding
- is done at the current cursor location. Deleting a response is
- done with ALT-D. The response your standing on will be deleted.
-
- Editing is done with the ENTER key. Move to the string you want
- to change and press the ENTER key. You can move down and up with
- the cursor keys. Use the TAB key to go to the next field on the
- same line.
-
- The Total field tells you how many strings have been defined.
-
- Option : Bps rate
- Description : Speed of the modem connection. This field is
- used by Concord to determine the speed of
- the connection. When using modems with
- error-corrections, this could be different
- from the value defined in the Response
- string value. Consult your modem manual for
- the correct strings.
- Example : 38400
-
- Option : Response string
- Description : String received from the modem when a
- connection has been established. These
- strings can also contain extra words when
- Concord is used with an error-correction
- modem. When using a high speed modem it is
- mostly necessary to place a '|' or '/'
- behind the 1200 connect string, to
- differentiate this string from the
- connection at 12000 Bps.
- Example : 28800
-
- Option : Errorlevel
- Description : Errorlevel to exit with when a connection is
- made. When using external programs to
- receive faxes, you can specify an errorlevel
- and Concord will exit to your batchfile with
- this errorlevel, allowing you to start the
- fax program. For normal Concord operations
- this option can be left as it is. The 0
- means Concord will handle the call.
- Example : 123
-
- You can return to the previous screen by pressing ESC.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 10
-
- 2.7.1.3 Path
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This is were you specify the directories Concord is using.
- Concord will ask you if it can create these directories if they
- do not exist at startup. Concord does not care if there is a
- | trailing backslash behind the directory or not, although you
- | should make it a habit to always add a backslash when entering
- | directory names.
-
- Option : Common path
- Description : Directory used by Concord for all nodes. In
- this directory you will find files that
- Concord will generate when running and which
- should be available to all nodes. We suggest
- you put this on a RAM drive if you have the
- memory for it. This will speed up Concord.
- See your DOS manual on creating a RAM drive.
- For multinode systems is this the directory
- where all files are stored that are used by
- all nodes.
- Example : C:\CONCORD\COMMON\
-
- Option : Swap path
- Description : Directory where Concord will put it's swap
- files. This will happen when you shell to
- DOS or when executing an external program in
- case there is no EMS memory available. This
- directory can be the same as the working
- directory. (See below)
- Example : C:\CONCORD\WORK\
-
- Option : Temp path
- Description : Directory used when the user is unpacking
- files in the temporary directory available
- from the menu options. (See menu options
- 1008 until 100D for more information.)
- Example : C:\CONCORD\TEMP\
-
- Option : Work path
- Description : Directory where Concord will place working
- files it needs to perform certain actions,
- like generating an off-line mail packet for
- QWK.
- Example : C:\CONCORD\WORK\
-
- Option : Nodelist path
- Description : Directory where your nodelists can be found.
- If you are using a mailer, this directory is
- probably already available and you should
- point it to the same place as defined in
- your mailer.
- Example : C:\IM\NODELIST\
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 11
-
- Option : File attach path
- Description : Directory where the directories are created
- when a user is attaching a file to another
- user on your BBS.
- Example : C:\CONCORD\LOCAL\
-
- Option : File base path
- Description : Directory where the filebase files (*.hdr
- and *.txt files) are stored.
- Example : C:\CONCORD\FILEBASE\
-
- Option : External chat
- Description : Option to specify an external chat program.
- When this is left empty, Concord will use
- the internal chat option. You can also
- specify options for Concord on this command
- line. (See menu option 0009 for more
- information on these options.)
- Example : C:\UTILS\CHAT.EXE *T *N
-
- Option : Virus scanner
- Description : Option to specify a virusscanner for
- scanning files on the BBS and after
- uploading. You will have to specify all
- options for the scanner. When no
- virusscanner is defined on this command
- | line, Concord will not do a virusscan. You
- | can also specify an external utility, like
- | Palmscan, to do the viruscheck. In this case
- | the utility will call the virusscanner.
- Example : C:\UTILS\F-PROT /NOMEM /OLD %1
-
- Option : JAM base path
- Description : Directory where the semaphore files for the
- JAM message base are created. This should be
- the same directory as specified in your
- Echo/Netmail tosser, like Gecho.
- Example : C:\M_AREA\JAM\
-
- Option : Local move path
- Description : Directory to which to move files when a
- local user is accessing the BBS. This is for
- example for the offline mail packets.
- Example : C:\CONCORD\STORAGE\
-
- | Option : Lng files path
- | Description : Directory where your language files can be
- | found
- | Example : C:\CONCORD\LNG\
- |
- | Option : .CTL files path
- | Description : Directory where the control files
- | (extensions .CTL) are stored.
- | Example : C:\CONCORD\CTL\
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 12
-
- | Option : Vote path
- | Description : Directory where the vote questions and
- | answers are stored.
- | Example : C:\CONCORD\VOTE\
-
- 2.7.1.4 Message system
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This part of the configuration is about the message system in
- Concord. Here some general options are defined. Most area
- specific options are set in the message area part of the
- configuration.
-
- Option : Quote string
- Description : Text used in message replies to distinguish
- the difference between your text and the
- quoted text. The quoted text will be
- preceded by the characters defined in this
- option. The standard quote string in Concord
- will give you the first characters of the
- first and lastname of the writer of the
- | message you are replying to. The smiling
- | face, which is the representation for the
- | initials, is generated by pressing Ctrl-P
- | and Ctrl-A.
- Example : >
-
- Option : Check user base
- Description : This option allows Concord to check if the
- user you are writing a message to in a LOCAL
- mail area, really exists in the userbase.
- Concord will inform you if a user does not
- exist when this option is on.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Cursor E msg hdr
- Description : Option to tell Concord if a message header
- is needed in quickscan cursor.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Fast jump to end
- Description : Option to allow Concord to jump to end of
- messages in the quickscan.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Default origin line
- Description : This string will be added to every echomail
- message sent from your system. The maximum
- length for this string is 80 characters,
- including your node number and the '*
- Origin: ' which Concord will place in front
- of your origin line. You are not allowed to
- use extended ASCII or ANSI codes in this
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 13
-
- line, because not all systems connected to
- FidoNet can handle these characters. You can
- select a different origin for every single
- echo in the message area part of the
- configuration. When no origin line is
- defined there, the one defined here is used.
- Example : NNN BBS - Concord REG/SUPP Site Holland
-
- Option : Min disk space
- | Description : Minimal disk space in Kbytes available
- needed to export a BlueWave/QWK/Omen message
- packet. If there is less space then defined,
- Concord will not pack and export messages.
- Example : 400
-
- Option : Max msgs to pack
- Description : Maximum number of messages to be packed in
- one message packet created for the
- BlueWave/QWK/Omen mail system.
- Example : 1000
-
- Option : Allow macros
- Description : Allow the use of the @xxxxx@ macros in
- messages.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Split messages
- Description : Split messages that are more then xx lines
- into more then one message. Some QWK mail
- readers have problems reading messages that
- are longer then 68 lines. With this option,
- you could prevent that the rest of the
- message is lost. Concord will add the rest
- of the lines to another message.
- Example : 68
-
- Option : Dupe list size
- Description : Number of messages to keep track of in the
- dupe list for the BlueWave/QWK/Omen mail
- system.
- Example : 1000
-
- Option : Read margin
- Description : This option defines the right margin when
- reading messages. this makes Concord wrap
- lines that are longer then the number
- specified here. This should normally be 78
- | or 79. Leave this to 0 for faster mail
- | handling, since this option is using lot of
- | the CPU power.
- Example : 79
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 14
-
- Option : Quote margin
- Description : Same as above, except now for quotes in the
- | messages. This should be around 65. Leave
- | this to 0 for faster mail handling, since
- | this option is using lot of the CPU power.
- Example : 65
-
- | Option : Password failure area
- | Description : Mail area number a user can write a message
- | in when failing all password tries. Make
- | sure that every user can write in this area.
- | Example : 1
-
- 2.7.1.5 File system
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Here you specify the general options for the file system in
- Concord. Note that you can specify options for every single file
- area in the file area part of the configuration.
-
- Option : Nervous file check
- Description : This option makes Concord check the file
- | list integrity at all times. This means that
- | Concord will check the directory to see if
- | the file is really there and not just listed
- | in the filebase as being there. If the file
- | is not there, Concord will replace the file
- | information with the word OFFLINE.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Import FILE_ID.DIZ
- Description : Most files on bulletin boards have a
- textfile which contains a description of the
- file. This file is mostly called FILE_ID.DIZ
- and should be a straight ASCII file of
- maximum 7 lines of 49 characters each. This
- file can be imported, if found after an
- upload, into the filebase. This will replace
- the description the user is giving for the
- file.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Check ratio files
- Description : Number of files downloaded after which
- Concord has to check the ratio settings from
- the user to see if the limits have been
- reached. If you set this to 0, no ratio
- check will be performed.
- Example : 5
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 15
-
- | Option : Prescan FILES.BBS
- | Description : Concord will scan the FILES.BBS directory
- | before doing a file list to speed up the
- | listing. This is a memory hungry option, so
- | if you do not have enough memory available,
- | leave this option off.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : Allow split descriptions
- | Description : Concord can show files in two different
- | ways. When this option is turned ON, file
- | descriptions will be shown, even if the
- | whole description of the last file on the
- | page does not fit on the page and is
- | continued on the next page. When this option
- | is turned OFF, the file that can not be
- | shown with the full description is moved to
- | the next page and is displayed after the
- | user selected the next page.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : Ext. upload checker
- | Description : Normally Concord will extract an newly
- | uploaded file and check the file for
- | viruses. But sometimes you want to use
- | something else, like an external program
- | with more options. If you do so and don't
- | want Concord to extract the file, set this
- | option to Yes.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : Findfirst on CDROM
- | Description : Concord only checks the filebase database
- | when showing files in a CD-Rom area. When
- | you have a fast CD-Rom drive, you can turn
- | this option on, which will force Concord to
- | check the CD-Rom drive to see if the file is
- | really there, before displaying it. Do not
- | use this option on slow CD-Rom drives as it
- | will slow down files display.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : FILES.BBS counter
- | Description : Concord will add a download counter to the
- | description of the uploaded file when this
- | option is used. Change the setting of this
- | option with the SPACEBAR. None means no
- | download counter is added.
- | Choices : None/[00]/[000]/[0000]
- |
- | Option : Max. file description lines
- | Description : This option allows you to limit the number
- | of lines displayed as a file description.
- | Example : 24
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 16
-
- 2.7.1.6 User config
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Without users a BBS system would be useless. That's why there is
- a user config option in the configuration program. Here you can
- define flags and set some general options for all users and how
- your system treats users.
-
- Option : Flag description
- Description : When the cursor in the configuration program
- is on this option, you can press SPACE (or
- F10) and a window will appear. In this
- window you can define the flags A1-A8 to
- J1-J8. You can enter a description for every
- flag. Keep them short and meaningful is the
- best way of doing it. These descriptions are
- shown to you when you have to set flags in
- the file areas, message areas and menu
- options. You can use the PgUp and PgDn keys
- to change the flag group. Use the cursor
- keys to move within the different flag
- | groups or press the corresponding character.
- | for example J and 8 will get you to flag J8.
- Pressing ESC will close the window and save
- the descriptions as you've entered them.
- Example : A1 - New users
- A2 - Normal user
- B2 - CD-Rom access
- J8 - Sysop
-
- Option : One word names
- Description : This option allows you to use one word names
- on your BBS system. Very useful if you are
- running a system with aliases and no real
- names. Normally Concord expects a first and
- last name. With this option turned on only
- one name is needed, however more name parts
- can be entered. For example login on with
- 'Jim' is allowed, but 'Jim Master' is also
- allowed. Concord will know that these are
- | different users. Note that when you are
- | running an 'Alias' system, that you need to
- | change some of the language lines, because
- | by default the 'Real' name is displayed.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 17
-
- Option : Expiration days
- Description : Days given to every new user in the
- 'expiration date field'. Concord will take
- a day of this number every day. This allows
- | you to run a scriptfile after a certain
- amount of days and change some of the users
- settings. You can change this setting for
- specific users in the user editor.
- Example : 30
-
- Option : Verify calls
- Description : Concord has the option to ask the user for
- his/her birthday every X calls. This option
- allows you to set that number of calls. When
- the wrong date of birth is entered, Concord
- will disconnect.
- Example : 15
-
- Option : Include Sysop
- Description : If you want yourself as the Sysop to be
- shown in the last callers list. set this
- option to Yes. If you don't want your users
- to see that you logged in, set this to No.
- In that case you're name will not appear in
- the last callers list.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Password tries
- Description : Number of times a user can enter his/her
- password at the logon prompt when the
- | password is not correct. If the user fails
- | all tries, he/she can write a message to the
- | Sysop. This does depend on the fact that a
- | mail area is specified in the message
- | configuration.
- Example : 3
-
- Option : Hide upper sec
- Description : Do not show security levels that are higher
- then the one from the user in the user list.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- 2.7.1.7 Net address
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Most BBS systems are connected to one or more networks. This
- allows them to exchange mail between systems. When you are
- joining a network, you will be assigned a node number. This node
- number is specifically for your system, like your street address
- is for your house. In this part of the configuration, you specify
- which addresses you have. You can also enter the name of the
- network and the netmail board number as defined in the message
- areas.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 18
-
- When you are entering mail areas you will have to enter a network
- address when it is an echomail area or netmail area. If you have
- for example 5 network addresses and delete the second one, you
- will notice that the line does not disappear, but changes to
- 0:0/0. This is done because these addresses are linked to the
- mail areas. If you would delete a network address and move the
- others up, your mail areas would suddenly use a different network
- address. If you delete the last network address of the 5 defined,
- it will really be removed and not changed to 0:0/0.
-
- You can use the following keys in this window:
-
- ALT-A : Add address. This will add an empty line at the
- bottom of the list.
- ALT-D : Delete address or change it to 0:0/0 when there
- are other network numbers below.
- ESC : Return to previous menu
-
- The 'Total' number in the right upper corner displays the number
- of network addresses defined.
-
- Option : Name
- Description : Name of the network. Mostly the network has
- a Domain name and you can enter that here or
- you can enter any name you like so you know
- which network you're talking about.
- Example : FidoNet
-
- Option : Address
- Description : The network address assigned to you by the
- network administrator. Address are entered
- in the following format:
-
- Zone:Net/Node.Pointnumber
-
- Do not make up a number yourself. If you are
- not connected to a network, leave these
- fields blank.
- Example : 2:2802/169.0
-
- 2.7.1.8 Limits
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- With the Limits part of the configuration you specify what every
- userlevel can do on your BBS. This is the main part of your
- security system. Here you specify how long a user can be online,
- how much he/she can download, what ratio checks are applying to
- the user and more. Security levels can range from 0 to as high
- as 65000. Take some time to think about how many levels you need
- and what security levels you assign to them.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 19
-
- When a certain userlevel is not defined, the first one below that
- level will be used. If you defined level 10 and 20, but your user
- has level 15, Concord will use the settings from the level 10
- settings.
-
- You can use the following keys in this window:
-
- ALT-A : Add user level. This will add an empty user level
- line above the currently highlighted level.
- ALT-D : Delete user level.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the userlevel to another location in the list. Press SHIFT
- when you are on the level you want to move and move the level
- with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the userlevel is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted
- userlevel is highlighted. This will display another window where
- all settings for this userlevel can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of levels defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active?
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this level is
- activated or not. When inactive, this level
- is not used by Concord. If the level is
- inactive, this is shown in the list window
- as a flag in front of the level.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Security level
- Description : The security level assigned to this level.
- Ranging between 0 and 65000. Do not use the
- same level twice, unless you are using the
- Valid to/Valid from option explained below.
- This level is shown in the list window.
- Example : 20
-
- Option : Description
- Description : A short explanation of what this userlevel
- is for. This is also show in the list
- window.
- Example : Normal user
-
- Option : Valid from
- Description : Time in 24 hour format from which the user
- is allowed to logon to your system. This is
- also shown in the list window.
- Example : 13:45
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 20
-
- Option : Valid to
- Description : Time in 24 hour format until which the user
- is allowed to logon to your system. This is
- also shown in the list window.
- Example : 23:45
-
- Together with the Valid from option, this allows you to specify
- time slots for your users. You could setup the same userlevel but
- with different settings by using these two time options. For
- example:
-
- Security : 25 and: 25
- Valid from : 00:00 18:00
- Valid to : 18:00 24:00
- Timelimit : 60 45
- Dl limit : 1000 500
-
- This would allow you to minimize user access at peek system
- times, so more users can access your system.
-
- Option : Max DL/UL KB ratio
- Description : The users download/upload ratio in
- Kilobytes. This means that if a user
- downloaded XX Kbytes, he/she has to upload
- YY Kbytes before another download can be
- done. For example setting this option to 2
- means that a user can download 200 Kbytes
- for every 100 Kbytes uploaded. When this
- option is set to 0, ratio on Kilobytes is
- disabled.
- Example : 15
-
- Option : Max DL/UL times ratio
- Description : The users download/upload ratio in files.
- This means that for every X file(s)
- uploaded, the user can download Y file(s).
- For example setting this option to 2 means
- that a user can download 2 files for every
- 1 file uploaded. Setting this option to 0
- disables the ratio check on files.
- Example : 5
-
- Option : Time limit
- Description : Time in minutes a user is allowed per day to
- stay online. When this time is expired, the
- user will see a warning and has to wait till
- the next day. Setting this option to 1440
- means that the user can stay online all day.
- (24 Hrs = 1440 min.)
- Example : 120
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 21
-
- Option : Call limit
- Description : Number of calls a day the user is allowed to
- make to your system. If the user exceeds
- this limit, he/she is not able to logon to
- the system any more that day, eventhough
- he/she might have enough time left for the
- day. Setting this option to 0 disables the
- check.
- Example : 5
-
- Option : Download limits
- | Description : Number of Kilobytes and files a user can
- download per day. This is depending on the
- connecting speed of the user. If the user is
- connecting on a speed not listed in the
- limits editor, Concord will use the first
- defined speed settings below the users
- connecting speed. For example a connecting
- speed of 16800 will use the 14400 settings.
- When a user exceeds the defined limits, a
- warning is displayed and the user cannot
- download anymore.
- Example : 1200
-
- 2.7.1.9 Events
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Events are actions performed by the system at certain times at
- certain days of the week. This allows you to run maintenance,
- clean up actions and other activities at quiet moments.
-
- You will have to setup Concord with a batchfile and errorlevels
- if you want to use this option, otherwise Concord will exit at
- the given time and weekday, but never returns.
-
- You can use the following keys in this window:
-
- ALT-A : Add event. This will add an empty event line
- above the currently highlighted event.
- ALT-D : Delete event.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the event to another location in the list. Press SHIFT when
- you are on the event you want to move and move the event with the
- arrow keys.
-
- Editing the event is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted event
- is highlighted. This will display another window where all
- settings for this event can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of events defined.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 22
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this event is
- activated or not. When inactive, this event
- is not used by Concord. If the event is
- inactive, this is shown in the list window
- as a flag in front of the event.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Options : Forced
- Description : If an event is scheduled, but a user is
- on-line at the given time, the event will be
- overdue and not be executed. When you force
- an event to be executed, Concord will reduce
- the time of the caller on-line, so he/she
- will be logged of just before the event
- starts. A warning message will be displayed
- to the user, telling him/her the time
- on-line is adjusted. Concord will not allow
- callers on-line within five minutes before
- the event.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Error level
- Description : This is the errorlevel Concord exits with at
- the time of the event. This allows you to
- start an external program from your
- batchfile. Do not use errorlevels between 0
- and 10 as these are used by Concord. Consult
- your DOS manual if you are unfamiliar with
- the use of errorlevels. Errorlevels may
- range from 10 to 255.
- Example : 124
-
- Option : Run time
- Description : Time for the event to be executed in 24 hour
- format.
- Example : 16:30
-
- Option : Days to run
- Description : The days on which to execute the event. You
- can select/deselect every day of the week.
- The days will show in the list window with
- there first characters.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 23
-
- | Option : Last run date
- | Description : Date the event was run for the last time.
- | This allows you to run certain events again,
- | or skip them for a period. Concord checks if
- | the day in this field is equal+1 to the
- | current date before executing the event.
- | Example : 04/11/95
-
- 2.7.1.10 Transfer protocols
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- To start with the bad news first, there are no internal protocols
- for Concord. Every protocol used by the program is an external
- one. The good news is, just like with anything else in Concord,
- you can have as many as you want.
-
- You can use the following keys in the file transfer window:
-
- ALT-A : Add transfer protocol. This will add an empty
- transfer protocol line above the currently
- highlighted transfer protocol.
- ALT-D : Delete transfer protocol.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the transfer protocol to another location in the list. Press
- SHIFT when you are on the transfer protocol you want to move and
- move the transfer protocol with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the transfer protocol is done by pressing ENTER when the
- wanted transfer protocol is highlighted. This will display
- another window where all settings for this transfer protocol can
- be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of transfer protocols defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this transfer
- protocol is activated or not. When inactive,
- this transfer protocol is not used by
- Concord. If the transfer protocol is
- inactive, this is shown in the list window
- as a flag in front of the transfer protocol.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Description
- Description : Name of the transfer protocol as it is shown
- to your users.
- Example : Zmodem-32
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 24
-
- Option : Selection key
- Description : Character shown to the user when he/she
- needs to select a protocol. You can only use
- a character ones.
- Example : Z
-
- Option : Batch
- Description : Informs Concord if this protocol defined
- here is a batch protocol or not. Batch
- protocols, like Zmodem, are protocols that
- allow the transfer of more then 1 file at a
- time.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Bidirectional
- Description : Informs Concord about the fact if the
- protocol is a bidirectional protocol or not.
- Bidirectional protocols can do an upload and
- download at the same time, making it
- necessary for Concord to check for uploads
- when this protocol is used for a download.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Download command line
- Description : The full line to execute this protocol for
- a download. You can use the following
- parameters which Concord will change into
- the necessary values:
-
- *B Current BPS rate
- *C Current comspec setting
- *N Current node
- *P Current com port
- *T User's time left
- %1 File name
- | %3 Next file in queue
-
- This part of the file transfer configuration
- is probably the most difficult. If you have
- problems getting a transfer program to work,
- contact the Concord Support sites or use the
- Concord echomail area. Use the full path to
- call the protocol. Most protocols allow the
- use of the @ character to allow the
- specification of a list of files to be
- transferred. See also 'Ctl file name' option
- | below. For some protocols, like DSZ, it
- | might be necessary to start a new command
- | processor before executing the protocol.
- | This is done by adding *C /C in front of the
- | command line.
- Example : See examples below
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 25
-
- Option : Upload command line
- Description : Same as the download command line, except
- now for the upload command. For some
- bidirectional transfer programs these two
- lines may be the same. Use the full pathname
- when calling the protocol.
- Example : See examples below
-
- Option : List char
- Description : Character that indicates that the following
- parameter is a list file. For most protocols
- this character is the '@', without the
- quotes. The listfile contains the names of
- the files to download. (See below)
- Example : @
-
- Option : Efficiency
- Description : Efficiency of the protocol in percentage.
- This is normally between 90 and 98 percent.
- Concord uses this percentage to calculate
- the amount of time needed for the transfer.
- If you set this to low, your users might not
- be able to download a file in the time left
- on the BBS, which in fact could have been
- downloaded, if you had told Concord the
- correct efficiency percentage.
- Example : 96
-
- Option : Log file name
- Description : Name of the logfile that is made by the
- protocol. This allows Concord to read the
- logfile and retrieve information from it. If
- this field is left empty, Concord will
- search for the DSZ environment variable and
- use that one instead.
- Example : C:\PROTOCOL\DSZ.LOG
-
- Option : Ctl file name
- Description : Name of the control file used by the
- transfer protocols as a list of files to
- transmit. This file is generated by Concord
- and used by most transfer programs. With
- most protocols it is specified on the
- commandline preceded by the @ character.
- Example : C:\PROTOCOL\FILES.CTL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 26
-
- Option : Upload log keyword
- Description : Character that indicates in the logfile that
- an upload has been performed. Note that this
- is a case sensitive character, in other
- words a 'Z' is something else then a 'z'.
- | Every protocol should have a different
- | character, most characters are prefixed for
- | a protocol. (See the DSZ documentation for
- | more information on this subject.)
- Example : Z
-
- Option : Download log keyword
- Description : Character that indicates in the logfile that
- a download has been performed. Note that
- this is a case sensitive character, in other
- words a 'Z' is something else then a 'z'.
- Example : z
-
- | Here are some keyword characters for some protocols:
- |
- | Name: Zmodem Download: z Upload: Z
- | Ymodem(-G) S R
- | HS/Link h H
- | Hydra h H
- | SModem s S
- |
- | Option : Read whole DSZ.LOG
- | Description : If you want Concord to read the whole
- | DSZ.LOG file after a download, turn this
- | option on. Normally Concord will know what
- | the last entry was and only reads the new
- | lines in the log file.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Here is an example for a protocol. This is for the 'free for non
- | commercial use' CEXYZ Zmodem by Cutting Edge Software protocol
- and is being used on my own BBS system.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 27
-
- CEXYZ Zmodem setup:
-
- Activated : Yes
- | Description : CEXYZ Zmodem
- Selection key : T
- Batch : Yes
- Bidirectional : No
- Download cmdline : c:\protocol\cexyz.exe /p*P /L38400 /b*B
- /sz @c:\protocol\files.ctl
- Upload cmdline : c:\protocol\cexyz.exe /p*P /L38400 /b*B
- /rz c:\upload\
- List char : @
- Efficiency : 95
- Log file name : c:\protocol\dsz.log
- Ctl file name : c:\protocol\files.ctl
- Upload ctl key : Z
- Download ctl key : z
- | Read whole DSZ.LOG : No
-
- Please refer to the Support sites or the Concord echomail area
- if you have trouble setting a protocol up.
-
- Please remember that most protocols are shareware and should be
- registered separately.
-
- All external protocol are independent programs, not belonging to
- Concord and not included in the Concord archive. Copyrights
- belong to their respective owners.
-
- 2.7.1.11 File archivers
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- You can use the following keys in the archiver window:
-
- ALT-A : Add archiver. This will add an empty archiver
- line above the currently highlighted archiver.
- ALT-D : Delete archiver.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the archiver to another location in the list. Press SHIFT
- when you are on the archiver you want to move and move the
- archiver with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the archiver is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted
- archiver is highlighted. This will display another window where
- all settings for this archiver can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of archivers defined.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 28
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this archiver is
- activated or not. When inactive, this
- archiver is not used by Concord. If the
- archiver is inactive, this is shown in the
- list window as a flag in front of the
- archiver.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Description
- Description : Name of the archiver as it is shown to your
- users.
- Example : PKZip 2.04G
-
- Option : Selection key
- Description : Character shown to the user when he/she
- needs to select an archiver. You can only
- use a character ones.
- Example : Z
-
- Option : File extension
- Description : Extension of the archived file. This is used
- by Concord when it creates an archive.
- Example : ZIP
-
- Option : Compress command line
- Description : Command line to activate the archiver to
- compress a file. You should use the full
- path to the archiver for safety reasons.
- There are 2 options available:
-
- %1 Filename to create
- %2 Filename to compress in %1
-
- You can use all options available to the
- archiver.
- Example : C:\ARCHIVER\PKZIP -XM %1 %2
-
- Option : Uncompress command line
- Description : Same as above except now for decompressing.
- There are 2 options available:
-
- %1 Compressed file
- %2 Filename to extract from %1
-
- You can use all options available to the
- archiver.
- Example : C:\ARCHIVER\PKUNZIP -O %1 %2
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 29
-
- Option : List char
- Description : Character that indicates that the next
- parameter is a list file.
- Example : @
-
- Option : Efficiency
- Description : Difference in percentage between the
- original size and the compressed file size.
- The higher this number the better the
- compression. For ZIP this is around 45%, ARJ
- is around 40% and LHA around 39%.
- Example : 45
-
- Option : Archive ID
- Description : Piece of code found in compressed files,
- identifying the compressor used. The
- following parameter is available:
-
- @[+|-]<num>; warps + = from begin
- - = from end
- Some ID characters need special key
- combinations to create.
- Example : PK
-
- Here is an example of the UltraCompressor archive. This example
- is by Ryan Murray.
-
- Active : Yes
- Description : UltraCompressor
- Selection key : U
- File extension : UC2
- Compress cmdline : c:\archiver\uc.exe a -bttf %1 %2
- Uncompress cmdline : c:\archiver\uc.exe e -f %1 %2
- List char : @
- Efficiency : 30
- Archive ID : UC2
-
- The Archive ID's last character can be entered with Ctrl-P, then
- hold down the Alt key while pressing 26 on the numeric keypad.
-
- 2.7.1.12 Full screen editors
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- | Concord has a build in line editor, but using full screen editors
- | is far more easy for most users. All editors, including the
- | internal one, need to be defined in this part of the
- | configuration.
-
- You can use the following keys in the FS editor window:
-
- ALT-A : Add FS editor. This will add an empty FS editor
- line above the currently highlighted FS editor.
- ALT-D : Delete FS editor.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 30
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the FS editor to another location in the list. Press SHIFT
- when you are on the FS editor you want to move and move the FS
- editor with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the FS editor is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted
- FS editor is highlighted. This will display another window where
- all settings for this FS editor can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of FS editors defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this FS editor
- is activated or not. When inactive, this FS
- editor is not used by Concord. If the FS
- editor is inactive, this is shown in the
- list window as a flag in front of the FS
- editor.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Description
- Description : Name of the FS editor as it is shown to your
- users.
- Example : Quicked
-
- Option : Selection key
- Description : Character shown to the user when he/she
- needs to select a FS editor. You can only
- use a character ones.
- Example : Q
-
- Option : Command line
- Description : Command line to execute the FS editor. All
- normal Concord options can be used on this
- | command line. When using the internal
- | editor, you will have to specify the '*'
- | character on this line.
- Example : C:\EDITOR\QUICKED.EXE %1 %2 %3 %4
-
- There are several editors available. Please note that most are
- shareware and should be separately registered.
-
- | There is no external editor included in the Concord archive.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 31
-
- 2.7.1.13 Character sets
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord can handle several different character sets. This allows
- you to let users who use different character sets, like some of
- the Scandinavian countries, to use your BBS without running into
- difficulties because of unsupported characters.
-
- You can use the following keys in the Character set window:
-
- ALT-A : Add Character set. This will add an empty
- Character set line above the currently
- highlighted Character set.
- ALT-D : Delete Character set.
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the Character set to another location in the list. Press
- SHIFT when you are on the Character set you want to move and move
- the Character set with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the Character set is done by pressing ENTER when the
- wanted Character set is highlighted. This will display another
- window where all settings for this Character set can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of Character sets defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this Character
- set is activated or not. When inactive, this
- Character set is not used by Concord. If the
- Character set is inactive, this is shown in
- the list window as a flag in front of the
- Character set.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Description
- Description : Name of the Character set as it is shown to
- your users.
- Example : Default
-
- Option : Selection key
- Description : Character shown to the user when he/she
- needs to select a Character set. You can
- only use a character ones.
- Example : D
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 32
-
- Option : Modify input
- Description : Concord normally only filters the outgoing
- characters. But it is possible to also
- filter incoming characters. You will have to
- switch this option on if you want to filter
- incoming characters.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- 2.7.1.14 Keyboard macros
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Keyboard macros allow you to use often used lines and programs
- quickly by pressing a key combination. Concord allows to types
- of macros. The first is the 'keyboard macro', the second one the
- 'Execute program macro'.
-
- The Shift-F1 to Shift-F10 keys are available to 'keyboard macros.
- These are often used lines of text. Move to the position you want
- the macro to be with the cursor keys and enter the information.
-
- Example: Hello world!
-
- The second row of 10 lines is the 'Execute program macro'
- definition field. Here you specify programs to be executed when
- the Ctrl-F1 to Ctrl-F10 keys are pressed.
-
- An example: *C
-
- 2.7.1.15 Other settings
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Option : Node number
- | Description : Number of lines on your BBS. Enter 1 for a
- single line system.
- Example : 3
-
- Option : Local colours
- Description : Show colours locally. If you have a
- monochrome monitor, you might want to set
- this option to No.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Password
- Description : Local keyboard password. This allows you to
- lock the keyboard. Remember, this is only
- locally, not remotely.
- Example : **********
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 33
-
- Option : Time out
- Description : Time out period in seconds for the user. If
- he/she didn't press the remote keyboard
- within this time period, Concord will
- disconnect. If you set this option to 0, no
- time checking is done.
- Example : 300
-
- Option : Login time
- Description : Time in minutes the user can take to logon
- to your system. If this time expires, the
- user is disconnected. Don't make this period
- to short, otherwise your new users won't be
- able to login.
- Example : 30
-
- Option : OS Shell
- Description : Commandline for Concord when Concord needs
- to shell to the operating system. You can
- use the following options here:
-
- *B Current BPS rate
- *C Current Comspec
- *D1- No DORINFO1.DEF file created
- *D2- No DOOR.SYS file created
- *D3- No EXITINFO.BBS file created
- *E- No EXITINFO.DAT file created
- *F User's first name
- *G User's colour mode
- *J User's screen length
- *L User's last name
- *N Current node
- *P Current COM port
- *R User's record number
- *T User's time left
- *S Amount to swap
-
- The *S option takes a parameter defining the
- | amount of memory to swap. With *S0 Concord
- | never swaps to disk before running an
- | external program, with *S<amount> Concord
- | always swaps to disk or EMS before running
- | an external program.
- Example : *C *S300
-
- Option : Last callers
- Description : Number of last callers displayed in the last
- callers list. When 0 is entered, the default
- of 15 is used.
- Example : 30
-
- Option : Sysop seclvl
- Description : Sysop security level.
- Example : 32000
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 34
-
- Option : Verify BBS
- Description : How many days between the times that the
- BBSses in the BBS list are verified.
- Example : 90
-
- Option : DORINFOn.DEF
- Description : For multiline systems, Concord can generate
- DORINFOn.DEF files where the n is replaced
- by the node number. For line 2, this would
- be DORINFO2.DEF. If this is set to no, all
- lines generate a DORINFO1.DEF file.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Detect scrlen
- Description : Concord can automatically detect the screen
- length the user is using when he/she logs on
- to your system. If you don't want this set
- this option to No.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Login charset
- Description : Characterset to use at logon, before Concord
- can determine who is online.
- Example : 0
-
- | Option : Force ANSI
- | Description : This option allows you to force the
- | emulation to ANSI when ASCII is detected at
- | login of the user.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Now for the Yell and Multi line settings. You need to press
- | SPACE, F10 or ENTER to open the edit window for these options.
-
- Option : Yell device
- Description : Device to use when the user is paging the
- Sysop. This can be three different options.
- The first is PC-Speaker, default for most
- systems. The second is Automatic, in which
- case Concord will see what is available and
- use that. This could be a soundcard if
- available. The last option is None. In this
- case the page will not be heard because no
- sound device is used.
- Choices : PC-Speaker/Automatic/None
-
- Option : Yell times
- Description : Number of times a user is allowed to page
- the Sysop.
- Example : 3
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 35
-
- Option : Yell length
- Description : Time in seconds that a yell will last before
- a message is displayed to the user.
- Example : 30
-
- Option : Sun from
- Description : Starting time in 24 hour format of the
- period that the Sysop can be paged.
- Example : 17:30
-
- Option : Sun to
- Description : Ending time in 24 hour format of the period
- that the Sysop can be paged. Outside this
- period specified with these options, a
- message is displayed telling the user the
- Sysop is not available for a chat.
- Example : 23:30
-
- This option is available for every day of the week. This allows
- you to have different yell times on different weekdays.
-
- Option : Online msgs
- Description : Time period in seconds after which Concord
- will check to see if there is a message from
- the other lines on a multiline system for
- the user. Set this to 0 if you don't want
- message checking.
- Example : 10
-
- | Option : Erase multi line chat
- | Description : Tells Concord to erase the multi line chat
- | textfile after use.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : Check multi line chat
- | Description : Checks every n seconds for new lines in the
- | multi line chat. When 0 is specified,
- | Concord will only check for new lines when
- | the textfile is updated.
- | Example : 5
- |
- | Option : No CHAT.LOG
- | Description : If you don't want a log file from your chats
- | with users, turn this option off, otherwise
- | a file called CHAT.LOG is created or
- | appended to when a chat is starting.
- | Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 36
-
- | Option : No user exit
- | Description : When you don't want your users to exit the
- | chat, turn this option on. Now only you can
- | terminate the chat.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Press ESC to return to the previous menu.
- |
- | Option : No ANS detect
- | Description : Concord can detect the terminal emulation
- | used by the person login in to your system.
- | This can cause problems with some systems.
- | If you don't want this automatic emulation
- | detection, turn this option on.
- | Choices : Yes/No
- |
- | Option : Hidden character
- | Description : When Concord displays text the is suppose to
- | be hidden, like the password entry at logon,
- | the character defined here will be used.
- | Example : *
- |
- | Option : ANSI stop character
- | Description : Character(s) which will stop the displaying
- | of an ANSI/ASCII file. When nothing is
- | entered, the character S is used to stop the
- | display.
- | Example : ^C
- |
- | Option : Status line colour
- | Description : Colour of the line displayed at the bottom
- | of the screen. The number 112 is the normal
- | black on grey colours.
- | Example : 112
- |
- | Option : Convert $ENV
- | Description : This option is useful for multi node systems
- | as it allows you to have one configuration
- | for several lines. Concord will replace the
- | $ENV variable with the pathname for the node
- | it is running.
- | Choices : Yes/No
-
- 2.7.2 Message areas
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This is the part of the configuration that defines the mail areas
- on your BBS. Each area is a group of messages related to each
- other by subject.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 37
-
- 2.7.2.1 Supported message bases
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord supports the following types of message bases:
-
- Type : Hudson Message Base (HMB)
- Description : This is the message base system used in
- SuperBBS, QuickBBS and RemoteAccess. It
- consists of a database file where all
- messages are stored. There are also some
- index files. All defined areas are in 1 main
- and 3 index files.
- Advantage : Quick to search. Just 4 files on your HD.
- Disadvantage : Maximum of around 13000 messages. With disk
- problems, you could lose the whole message
- base.
-
- Type : Multiple Hudson Message Base
- Description : Several separate Hudson message bases. The
- message base files are located in different
- directories.
- Advantage : Quick to search, many more messages then
- single HMB. Only 4 files per message base.
- Disadvantage : Not supported at this moment by most
- echomail tossers. Disk problems can still
- cause the loss of many messages in several
- areas.
-
- Type : JAM
- Description : This type of messagebase is the least
- sensitive to diskproblems, because every
- message area you define has it's own 4
- files. Size of the messagebase is only
- limited by diskspace.
- Advantage : Unlimited size. Separate files for every
- area.
- Disadvantage : Slow to search. Can take up a lot of
- diskspace.
-
- Type : .MSG
- Description : The oldest message base around. Every
- message is stored as a single file. This can
- take up huge amounts of diskspace. This type
- of message base is normally only used for
- the netmail area of the mailer.
- Advantage : Every message has it's own file, so
- diskproblems could have minor damage
- results.
- Disadvantage : Takes up huge amounts of diskspace,
- depending on your disk allocation size.
- Normally very slow in searching messages.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 38
-
- It depends on your system which message base is the best for you.
- If you only have a few message areas and not many messages, the
- HMB type message base is the best. If you have many areas with
- great amount of messages, use JAM.
-
- Concord will support other mail formats in the future.
-
- 2.7.2.2 Message areas configuration
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Press ENTER when the selection bar is on the 'Msg areas' in the
- main menu bar and you will be presented with a window which has
- the following options:
-
- ALT-A : Add message area. This will add an empty message
- area line at the end of the list.
- ALT-D : Delete message area. This only marks the area to
- be deleted. You need to use the F5 key to really
- delete the area.
- F5 : Purge all deleted message areas. Until you
- pressed this key, you can still undelete a
- message area.
- F8 : Change global settings. (See 2.7.2.3)
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the message area to another location in the list. Press
- SHIFT when you are on the message area you want to move and move
- the message area with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the message areas is done by pressing ENTER when the
- wanted message area is highlighted. This will display another
- window where all settings for this message area can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of Message areas defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Name
- Description : The name of the message area as it is
- displayed in Concord to the users.
- Example : Local messages
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this message
- areas is activated or not. When inactive,
- this message areas is not used by Concord.
- If the message areas is inactive, this is
- shown in the list window as a flag in front
- of the message areas.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 39
-
- Option : Short name
- Description : The name used by the offline mail system for
- this message area. This name is only used in
- the QWK/BlueWave/Omen mail system. The name
- specified above is used in the BBS system
- itself.
- Example : Local msgs
-
- Option : Group
- Description : A three character word describing the group
- that this message area is belonging to.
- Concord allows you to have different groups
- and some of the menu commands can handle
- these groups. You are allowed to use less
- then 3 characters. If you don't want to use
- a group description, you will have to change
- many textlines in the language file (see
- chapter 3), because the group macro is used
- in the language file. Here are some examples
- of group descriptions:
-
- LOK General local mail
- NAT National echomail areas
- INT International areas
-
- You are free to define your own groupnames,
- these where only given as examples.
- Example : LOK
-
- Option : Format
- Description : Type of message base for this area. Concord
- allows you to use multiple message bases
- together at the same time. See chapter
- 2.7.2.1 for a description of the different
- message base types.
- Choices : JAM/.MSG/Hudson
-
- Option : Path name
- Description : The full path to where the message base
- files are stored. This line can have various
- definitions, depending on the message base
- type used:
-
- JAM message base:
-
- You will have to specify the full path AND
- the name of the message area files to use,
- WITHOUT the extension. For example:
-
- C:\MAIL\JAM\GENERAL
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 40
-
- The 'GENERAL' in this line is not a
- directory but the name of the files for this
- message area. Concord will create the files.
- There will be four files created with the
- defined name. (That's why you should not
- give an extension!)
-
- .MSG message base:
-
- You only specify the directory where the
- message files for this area will be stored.
- Remember that every message will have it's
- own .MSG file. You will have to make
- different directories for every message area
- you have, because the messages are all
- numbered the same in every area. An example:
-
- C:\MAIL\MSG\GENERAL
-
- In this case the 'GENERAL' is a directory
- name where the .MSG files will be stored.
-
- Hudson message base:
-
- You have to specify the directory where the
- messagebase files are stored. Every message
- area should point to this same directory,
- unless you are using multiple Hudson message
- bases. An example:
-
- C:\MAIL\HMB
-
- In this case the 'HMB' is a directory where
- the message base files are stored. If you
- use multiple messages bases you can define
- several directories. Remember, it is not
- possible to store more then 1 Hudson Message
- Base in the same directory.
- Example : C:\MAIL\HMB
-
- Option : Password
- Description : If you define a password, Concord will ask
- for the password, before allowing access to
- the area.
- Example : ************
-
- Option : Open from
- Description : Time in 24 hour format at which time the
- area will be available to the users. This
- time is security level independent.
- Example : 13:45
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 41
-
- Option : Open to
- Description : Time in 24 hour format at which time the
- area will no longer be available to the
- users. In combination with the 'Open from'
- option, this allows you to close an area of
- between certain times.
- Example : 23:50
-
- Option : Area type
- Description : There are three types of areas available in
- Concord:
-
- Local mail:
-
- Messages that will never leave your system.
- They are messages between users on your BBS.
- Concord will just save the message. The
- recipient of the messages is normally a user
- on the BBS and Concord can check for this
- and warn you if the message is to somebody
- who is not in the userlist. Messages can be
- private or public.
-
- Echomail:
-
- These messages are exported to other BBS
- systems. The receiver can be anybody,
- normally not a user on the same BBS.
- Echomail areas are spread all over the
- country and even the world. Concord will add
- an origin line to the message and the
- address to use. You could compare this type
- of messages with the advertisements in the
- paper. Everybody can read and reply to them.
- Echomail is never private!
-
- Netmail:
-
- These messages are destinated for a certain
- person at a certain BBS somewhere in the
- world. The are mostly private messages. You
- can compare this with the normal mail you
- receive at home. You sent it from one
- address to another. Concord will ask for a
- netmail address if you enter a netmail
- message. You will need to have a nodelist
- and a netmail number for this option to be
- operational. Please remember that although
- netmail is mostly private, every Sysop where
- the message is passing by can read the
- message. (Encryption is not much used within
- the BBS organisations.)
- Choices : Local/Echomail/Netmail
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 42
-
- Option : Msg kinds
- Description : There are four types of messages available
- with Concord:
-
- Private messages:
-
- These can only be read by the sender and
- receiver of the message. Note that also
- anybody with Sysop level can read private
- messages. You should make this clear to your
- users. This type of messages is normally
- only used in netmail area types.
-
- Public messages:
-
- These messages can be read by everybody.
- This type of messages is normally used in
- echomail areas.
-
- Both:
-
- Allows both the use of private and public
- messages. This is normally the case with
- local message areas, unless you want all
- messages to be private.
-
- Read only:
-
- This type of message area allows you only to
- read the messages and not reply to them or
- write new messages in the area.
- Choices : Private/Public/Both/Read only
-
- Option : Reply status
- Description : Sending messages normally means getting
- replies. There are four options available
- for replying:
-
- Normal:
-
- This means that the message you made when
- you replied will be sent in the same area as
- where the original message was in. Used for
- local and echomail areas.
-
- Netmail:
-
- The message you wrote as a reply will be
- sent as netmail. Concord will take the
- sender's address from the origin line of the
- message. Used for echomail areas.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 43
-
- Both:
-
- Concord will ask how you want to reply, by
- echomail or by netmail.
-
- None:
-
- Replying is not possible. Use this in
- combination with the 'Read only' area type
- to make an area read only.
- Choices : Normal/Netmail/Both/None
-
- Option : Alias/Name
- Description : This option allows you to specify which name
- will be used when writing a message. There
- are four options:
-
- Real name:
-
- Message written will have the real name as
- defined in Concord's userbase as the
- sender's name.
-
- Ask alias:
-
- Concord will ask for an alias to use as the
- sender of the message. Please note that this
- can be anything you want. This doesn't have
- to be the alias specified in the Concord's
- userbase. Also note that Concord will not
- check for messages received at the system
- with the used alias, as no list is kept of
- the aliases used. Concord only checks for
- the in the userbase defined alias and
- username.
-
- Both:
-
- Concord will ask if an alias will be used.
- If answered negative, Concord will use the
- real name of the message writer. Please note
- that the alias used in this option is the
- alias defined in the userbase and not the
- alias as described in the 'Ask alias'
- option.
-
- Aliases:
-
- When this option is used, the alias defined
- in the userbase of Concord will be used as
- the sender's name. Please note the
- difference with the 'Ask alias' option.
- Choices : Real name/Ask alias/Both/Aliases
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 44
-
- Option : Use AKA
- Description : When entering this field, another window
- appears with the defined AKA's. Press ENTER
- and then choose the one you want to use for
- this area with the cursor keys and press
- ENTER. This option is only needed for
- Echomail and Netmail types of areas.
- Example : 2:2802/169
-
- Option : Origin line
- Description : All echomail messages will have an origin
- line underneath the message. If you leave
- this option blank the default origin line
- will be used as defined in the general
- configuration part. If you want to use a
- specific origin line for this area, you can
- enter it here. This only applies to echomail
- type areas. With other area types this
- option is ignored.
- Example : NNN BBS - Call now: 31.188059592 - 24 Hrs
-
- Option : Allow delete
- Description : Allow users to delete messages. Only
- messages addressed to the user or written by
- the user can be deleted by the user. Anybody
- with Sysop level can delete every message,
- even if it is not addressed to them or
- written by them.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Allow tag lines
- Description : The offline readers allow at the end of a
- message a line with some remark on it. This
- line is called a tagline. Since these lines
- are not allowed in every echomail area,
- there is this option to allow or not allow
- the use of taglines. Please check the
- echomail rules before turning this option on
- for the selected area. If this option is set
- to 'No', Concord will strip the tagline of
- the message if the user appended one.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Allow file attach
- Description : Concord allows you to sent a file along with
- a message from one user to another. If you
- select 'No', this option is disabled. Do not
- use this option on netmail and echomail
- areas.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 45
-
- Option : Combined area
- Description : The combined area on the BBS is a special
- area where all messages are read after one
- other, instead of per area. If you set this
- option to 'No', this area is not available
- to the user by default in the combined area.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Allow ctrl chars
- Description : Control characters are characters which have
- special meanings for Concord. When you use
- these characters in a message, Concord will
- translate them into certain bits of
- information. (See the chapter on control
- codes for more info.) You don't always want
- to use these characters in messages, because
- it can be confusing to other users who read
- the message.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Force mail check
- description : Some of your users might not have an area
- selected for mail check, eventhough you
- would like them to have a mail check in that
- particular area. When you turn this option
- on, a mail check is always done on this area
- and the user cannot deselect the area.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- | Concord allows a directory structure in the mail areas, file
- | areas and doors. To explain this, here is an example of a normal
- | structure:
- |
- | -------- Area 1 - General mail area
- | |
- | |-- Area 2 - Concord mail area
- | |
- | |-- Area 3 - Concord utilities mail area
- | |
- | |-- Area 4 - Pascal mail area
- | |
- | |-- ........
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 46
-
- | As you can see, all areas are available from the same selection
- | menu. When using the sub-directory option in Concord, the
- | following structure is possible:
- |
- | -------- Area 1 - General mail area
- | |
- | |-- Area 2 - Concord areas ------ Area 3 - Concord area
- | | |
- | | |-- Area 4 - Concord utils
- | | |
- | | |-- Area 5 - Main list
- | |
- | |-- Area 6 - Programmers -------- Area 7 - Pascal
- | | |
- | | |-- .........
- |
- | As you can see, this will group together the different type of
- | areas. Well, how do you set something up like this? You need one
- | master area, in this case area 2, which points to a group of
- | areas. Then you need your areas and one area to return to the
- | master list. Here is an overview:
- |
- | Num: Name: Subdir CurrSub WhereToJump
- | ---- ------------------- --------- --------- -------------
- | 1 General area No 0 0
- | 2 Concord area Yes 0 10
- | 3 Concord mail area No 10 0
- | 4 Concord utils No 10 0
- | 5 Main list Yes 10 0
- | 6 Programmers Yes 0 20
- | 7 Pascal No 20 0
- | 8 .................. .... ... ....
- |
- | So area 1 is a normal area. Area 2 points to a group of areas.
- | These areas all belong to the group with sub-directory number 10.
- | Area 3 and 4 belong to this group. Area 5 also belongs to this
- | group but points to another subdirectory group, group 0, which
- | is the main list. Area 6 points to another group, in which area
- | 7 is located. When a user selects the select area command, he/she
- | will see area 1, area 2, area 6 and other areas which have 0 as
- | there 'Current Sub-directory number. When area 2 is selected by
- | the user, he/she will see only the areas 3, 4 and 5 and maybe any
- | other area that has number 10 in the current sub-directory
- | number. When he/she selects 5, he/she is placed back in the main
- | group.
- |
- | Hope this will make it clear how the sub-directory structure is
- | working. Remember, every group needs at least one normal area
- | (like area 1 or 3 or 7) and at least one area to return to the
- | previous list. You can have links pointing from every group to
- | any other group to another group, to another group and so on.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 47
-
- Option : Sub directory
- | Description : This option tells Concord if this area entry
- | is a normal area or pointing to another
- | group of areas. (Like area 2 in the above
- | example.) Normal areas have this set to No.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Curr subdir num
- | Description : This option tells Concord to which group of
- | areas this area belongs. All areas which use
- | the same number belong together. (Like area
- | 3, 4 and 5 in the above example.) You can
- | choose any number you want for this, but
- | keep it simple never hurts. Every group
- | should have at least one normal area and one
- | area pointing to the main list.
- Example : 10
-
- Option : Where to jump
- | Description : This option tells Concord to which area
- | group to jump. This option is used in areas
- | that are no real areas, but point to another
- | group of areas. (Like area 2 and 5 in the
- | above example.)
- Example : 0
-
- Option : Use char table
- Description : Which character set is to be used in this
- area? This option allows you to adjust the
- character table to the area. This could be
- useful when you have Scandinavian areas on
- your board, because they use a different
- character set then most people do. When 0 is
- entered, Concord uses the default character
- set.
- Example : 2
-
- Option : Hudson board
- Description : Which board number in the Hudson Message
- Base corresponds with this area. This is
- only needed if you use the HMB area type.
- (See Format.) The number can vary between 1
- and 200.
- Example : 47
-
- Option : Force CR in quote
- Description : This option determines if Concord is using
- a hard carriage return in quotes that are to
- long or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 48
-
- | Option : Force combined
- | Description : This option allows you to force an area
- | combined for all users.
- | Choices : Yes/No
-
- Now we come to the security bit of the message area. You can
- specify for every area the read message security, write message
- security and Sysop security.
-
- When the option you want to modify is highlighted, press the
- space bar to enter the window where you can modify the settings.
-
- The following settings are available:
-
- Option : Security level
- Description : Security level needed to read messages in
- this area. If the users level is lower then
- the level specified here, the user will not
- be able to read in this area.
- Example : 10
-
- Option : Flags
- Description : Flagsettings needed for reading messages in
- this area. If the flagsettings of the user
- do not match the settings here, the user
- will not be able to read messages in this
- area. Press space bar to enter the window
- where you can change the flagsettings. There
- are three settings available, 'On', 'Off'
- and 'Don't care'. You can change the
- settings by pressing the space bar. 'Yes'
- means flag is on, 'No' means flag is off and
- no remark at the end of the line means
- 'don't care'. You can change the
- flagdescription by pressing ENTER. This
- means you don't have to go back to another
- part of the configuration program if you
- want to change a name of a flag. Press
- Escape to return to the previous window.
- Choices : Yes/No/Don't care
-
- Option : Age
- Description : Minimum age required to gain access to this
- area. 0 means 'don't care'.
- Example : 21
-
- Option : Bps rate
- Description : Connection speed needed to gain access to
- this message area. Any speed below the
- specified Bps rate will not have access to
- this area. Any speed higher then the
- specified speed will have access.
- Example : 14400
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 49
-
- The option mentioned here are also available in the 'Write msgs
- security', which specifies the necessary rights to write a
- message in the area, and in the 'Sysop security' option, which
- specifies the levels needed to gain Sysop access to the message
- area.
-
- Please note that everybody with Sysop level access to the message
- area can read every message, included private ones, in the area
- and has full access to all options available in the area.
-
- 2.7.2.3 Global mail area options
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- When you need to change some information for several areas, there
- is an other way of doing so then editing every single area. When
- you are in the list menu where all defined areas are shown, you
- can press the F8 key. This will bring up a window prompting you
- for the group name you want to edit.
-
- When you entered a groupname, or pressed ENTER when you didn't
- use groupnames, Concord will display another window with the
- options you can change globally, in other words, for all areas
- within the group at the same time.
-
- These options are:
-
- - Password
- - Open from
- - Open to
- - Read msgs security
- - Write msgs security
- - Sysop security
- | - Name
- | - Short name
-
- This allows you to quickly edit a large number of areas in one
- go. This option will be changed in the future.
-
- 2.7.3 File areas
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord supports an unlimited number of file areas. These can be
- on harddisk's in your machine, on CD-Rom's (including CD-Rom
- changers) or on network drives.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 50
-
- 2.7.3.1 File areas configuration
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Press ENTER when the selection bar is on the 'File areas' in the
- main menu bar and you will be presented with a window which has
- the following options:
-
- ALT-A : Add file area. This will add an empty file area
- line at the end of the list.
- ALT-D : Delete file area. This only marks the area to be
- deleted. You need to use the F5 key to really
- delete the area.
- F5 : Purge all deleted file areas. Until you pressed
- this key, you can still undelete a file area.
- F8 : Change global settings. (See 2.7.3.2)
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the file area to another location in the list. Press SHIFT
- when you are on the file area you want to move and move the file
- area with the arrow keys.
-
- Editing the file areas is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted
- file area is highlighted. This will display another window where
- all settings for this file area can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of file areas defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Name
- Description : The name of the file area as it is displayed
- in Concord to the users.
- Example : Concord main program
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this file areas
- is activated or not. When inactive, this
- file areas is not used by Concord. If the
- file areas is inactive, this is shown in the
- list window as a flag in front of the file
- areas.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Group
- Description : Group this file area belongs to. This can be
- any three character combination. This option
- allows you to group certain file areas
- together. No characters, or less then 3 is
- also possible.
- Example : BBS
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 51
-
- Option : Download path
- Description : Place where the files are to be found for
- this file area. Concord will look here for
- the files.
- Example : c:\files\concord\
-
- Option : Upload path
- Description : Place where uploaded files are placed. If no
- directory is given, this is the same as the
- download directory. (This is not possible
- when using a CD-Rom!) If you specify a
- directory, Concord will place uploaded files
- in that area.
- Example : c:\upload
-
- Option : Password
- Description : When you want to secure the area with a
- password, you can enter one here. Concord
- will ask the user for the password, before
- he/she is allowed to enter the area.
- Example : Password
-
- Option : Open from
- Description : Time in 24 hour format from which moment on
- the file area is available.
- Example : 07:14
-
- Option : Open to
- Description : Time in 24 hours format until the area is
- available to users. Together with the
- previous option, this allows you to close
- certain areas on certain times.
- Example : 23:00
-
- Option : Curr subdir num
- | Description : This tells Concord to which group the area
- | belongs. See the message configuration for
- | an example on setting up this structure
- | within Concord. For normal areas this should
- | be 0.
- Example : 10
-
- Option : Where to jump
- | Description : This tells Concord to which group of areas
- | to jump.
- Example : 3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 52
-
- | Option : Offline area
- | Description : This option is useful for systems that
- | changes CD-Rom drives often. When this
- | option is turned off, Concord will display
- | the OFFLINE message when viewing the files.
- | This allows you to display all CD-Rom areas
- | available, eventhough the CD-Rom is
- | currently not in the drive but will be for
- | example next monday from 00:00 to 23:59.
- | Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : New files check
- Description : Option to specify if Concord should include
- this area in the new files check. This
- allows you to disable new files checking on
- CD-Rom drives.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Combined area
- Description : Is this file area to be included in the
- combined area or not. This allows you to
- perform certain functions on several areas.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Duplicate check
- Description : Let Concord check this area for duplicates
- when somebody does an upload.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Virus check
- Description : Is Concord to scan the uploaded file for
- viruses or not. Please note that this option
- only works when you specified a virusscanner
- in the Path configuration part of the
- program.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Free files
- Description : This option allows you to specify if files
- in this area when downloaded are subtracted
- from the users account or not. When the
- files are free, the used KiloBytes and time
- are not deducted from the users limits. This
- could be useful for Allfiles lists. Please
- note that if this option is switched on ALL
- files in this file area will be free files.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : CD-Rom area
- Description : This specifies if the area is a CD-Rom area
- or not. If it is a CD-Rom area, a separate
- FILES.BBS list have to be specified, because
- CD-Rom's are read only. (See below)
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 53
-
- Option : Not in list
- Description : Normally only files listed in the FILES.BBS
- file/the filebase can be downloaded. But
- when you switch this option on, also files
- available in the directory, but not listed
- in the FILES.BBS/Filebase can be downloaded
- as well.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Sub-directory
- | Description : This option tells Concord if this area is a
- | pointer to a group of file areas. See the
- | mail areas configuration part for an example
- | on the sub-directory options in Concord. For
- | normal areas this option is set to 'No'.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Force FILES.BBS
- Description : Normally, to gain the most speed in the
- filebase, you would use the database type of
- filelist's used by Concord. But sometimes it
- is needed to use the old FILES.BBS type
- files. (Currently Concord is not using both
- at the same time.) Here you can specify if
- the database is to be used for this area or
- the old style FILES.BBS files. The database
- is faster.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Files
- | Description : This option allows you to change the name of
- | the database file used by Concord to hold
- | your files for this area. In the first Gamma
- | release, this was a fixed name, but now it
- | is possible to change this name to anything
- | you want, within MS-Dos rules. The old
- | system didn't allow the use of the same file
- | area name, this system does, because you can
- | change the name in this field. You can find
- the files specified in this field in the
- FILEBASE directory specified in the PATH
- part of the configuration program.
- | Example : AREA-001.*
-
- Option : FILES.BBS
- Description : You only need to specify something in this
- field if the FILES.BBS list is not in the
- same directory as the files or when the area
- is a CD-Rom area. You will have to place the
- FILES.BBS files for the CD-Rom area on your
- HD, so Concord (and other programs) can edit
- them if needed. Normally you would call your
- first CD-Rom area FILES.001, the second
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 54
-
- FILES.002 and so on, but you are free to do
- it in your own way. Some external programs
- use the FILES.xxx type names. You could give
- the FILES.BBS list any name according to MS-
- Dos file name rules. Don't forget to specify
- the full path!
- Example : c:\files\cdrom\files.085
-
- Now we come to the security bit of the file area. You can specify
- for every area the download security, upload security and list
- files security.
-
- When the option you want to modify is highlighted, press the
- space bar to enter the window where you can modify the settings.
-
- The following settings are available:
-
- Option : Security level
- Description : Security level needed to download files in
- this area. If the users level is lower then
- the level specified here, the user will not
- be able to download from this area.
- Example : 10
-
- Option : Flags
- Description : Flagsettings needed for downloading files in
- this area. If the flagsettings of the user
- do not match the settings here, the user
- will not be able to download files in this
- area. Press space bar to enter the window
- where you can change the flagsettings. There
- are three settings available, 'On', 'Off'
- and 'Don't care'. You can change the
- settings by pressing the space bar. 'Yes'
- means flag is on, 'No' means flag is off and
- no remark at the end of the line means
- 'don't care'. You can change the
- flagdescription by pressing ENTER. This
- means you don't have to go back to another
- part of the configuration program if you
- want to change a name of a flag. Press
- Escape to return to the previous window.
- Choices : Yes/No/Don't care
-
- Option : Age
- Description : Minimum age required to download from this
- area. 0 means 'don't care'.
- Example : 21
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 55
-
- Option : Bps rate
- Description : Connection speed needed to download from
- this file area. Any speed below the
- specified Bps rate will not be able to
- download from this area. Any speed higher or
- equal to the specified speed will be able to
- download
- Example : 14400
-
- The option mentioned here are also available in the 'Upload files
- security', which specifies the necessary rights to upload a file
- in the area, and in the 'List files security' option, which
- specifies the levels needed to list the files in this area.
-
- 2.7.3.2 Global file area options
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- When you need to change some information for several areas, there
- is an other way of doing so then editing every single area. When
- you are in the list menu where all defined areas are shown, you
- can press the F8 key. This will bring up a window prompting you
- for the group name you want to edit.
-
- When you entered a groupname, or pressed ENTER when you didn't
- use groupnames, Concord will display another window with the
- options you can change globally, in other words, for all areas
- within the group at the same time.
-
- These options are:
-
- | - Name
- - Password
- - Open from
- - Open to
- - Download files security
- - Upload files security
- - List files security
- | - Download path
-
- This allows you to quickly edit a large number of areas in one
- go.
-
- 2.7.4 Doors
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Doors, or external programs, allow you to expand your system with
- other programs. These can be specially written to be used with
- Concord or completely different programs.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 56
-
- 2.7.4.1 Doors configuration
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Press ENTER when the selection bar is on the 'Doors' in the main
- menu bar and you will be presented with a window which has the
- following options:
-
- ALT-A : Add door. This will add an empty door line at the
- end of the list.
- ALT-D : Delete door. This only marks the area to be
- deleted. You need to use the F5 key to really
- delete the area.
- F5 : Purge all deleted doors. Until you pressed this
- key, you can still undelete a door.
- F8 : Change global settings. (See 2.7.4.2)
- ESC : Return to previous menu.
-
- You can use the SHIFT key in combination with the arrow keys to
- move the door to another location in the list. Press SHIFT when
- you are on the door you want to move and move the door with the
- arrow keys.
-
- Editing the doors is done by pressing ENTER when the wanted door
- is highlighted. This will display another window where all
- settings for this door can be edited.
-
- The 'Total' number in the upper area of the window displays the
- number of doors defined.
-
- When ENTER is pressed another window appears with the following
- options:
-
- Option : Name
- Description : The name of the door as it is displayed in
- Concord to the users.
- Example : Time clock
-
- Option : Active
- Description : Informs you as the Sysop if this door is
- activated or not. When inactive, this door
- is not used by Concord. If the door is
- inactive, this is shown in the list window
- as a flag in front of the door.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Group
- Description : Group this door belongs to. This can be any
- three character combination. This option
- allows you to group certain doors together.
- No characters, or less then 3 is also
- possible.
- Example : UTI
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 57
-
- Option : Command line
- Description : This is the hard bit again. Here you specify
- how the door should be called by Concord.
- Please note that some doors require a batch
- file, instead of just one line. Enter the
- full path to the door.
- Example : C:\DOORS\TETI\TETI.EXE -60 SPIJKENISSE
-
- Option : Password
- Description : Password needed to enter this door. When no
- password is entered, the user will not be
- asked for one.
- Example : Password
-
- Option : Open from
- Description : Starting time in 24 hour format from which
- this door is available to the users.
- Example : 14:30
-
- Option : Open to
- Description : Closing time in 24 hour format for this
- door. This allows you to have doors
- available only on certain times.
- Example : 19:30
-
- Option : Sub-directory
- | Description : This option tells Concord if this area is a
- | pointer to a group of other doors. See the
- | mail areas configuration for an example.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Curr subdir num
- | Description : This option tells Concord to which group
- | this door belongs.
- Example : 2
-
- Option : Where to jump
- | Description : This option tells Concord to which group of
- | doors to jump when this door is selected.
- Example : 3
-
- Run door security is the part where you specify who has access
- to the door. Press SPACE when this option is highlighted and
- another window appears where you can specify the following
- options:
-
- Option : Security level
- Description : Security level needed to have access to this
- door. If the users level is lower then the
- level specified here, the user will not be
- able to gain access to this door.
- Example : 10
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 58
-
- Option : Flags
- Description : Flagsettings needed for access to this door.
- If the flagsettings of the user do not match
- the settings here, the user will not be able
- to access this door. Press space bar to
- enter the window where you can change the
- flagsettings. There are three settings
- available, 'On', 'Off' and 'Don't care'. You
- can change the settings by pressing the
- space bar. 'Yes' means flag is on, 'No'
- means flag is off and no remark at the end
- of the line means 'don't care'. You can
- change the flagdescription by pressing
- ENTER. This means you don't have to go back
- to another part of the configuration program
- if you want to change a name of a flag.
- Press Escape to return to the previous
- window.
- Choices : Yes/No/Don't care
-
- Option : Age
- Description : Minimum age required to access this door. 0
- means 'don't care'.
- Example : 21
-
- Option : Bps rate
- Description : Connection speed needed to access this door.
- Any speed below the specified Bps rate will
- not be able to access this door. Any speed
- higher or equal to the specified speed will
- be able to use the door.
- Example : 14400
-
- We will have a look at the language file in chapter 3. Leave it
- the way it is for now. Select QUIT from the menu bar and we will
- return to the installation program.
-
- 2.8 The user editor
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The user files are next. CSETUP.EXE will be started in user edit
- | mode to create new user files. You can always start the
- | configuration program in user edit mode by entering CSETUP USER
- | at the dos prompt. Once this is done you will have to change the
- settings for your 'Default' user.
-
- Some of the available keys in the user editor are:
-
- F1 Display Concord documentation
- F2 Edit current user
- F3 Display userlist
- F4 Display/Edit flags for this user
- F10 Display menu
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 59
-
- ALT-F Display/Edit flags for this user
- ALT-S Edit user security level
- ALT-D Toggle delete field
- PgDn Next screen
- PgUp Previous screen
- ENTER Switch to edit mode
- SPACE Toggle options in edit mode
- Arrows Move within screen when in edit mode
-
- More keys are available. See the menu for shortcuts to most of
- the options available.
-
- When the User editor is started, you are presented with user
- number 0 from your userlist. In case you started the User editor
- with the -CREATE option, as the installation program does, you
- will only have one user called DEFAULT USER. Never delete this
- user!
-
- This user is very important as it defines the settings for your
- new users calling in to your system. Here you specify which
- securitylevel they will have, what their default settings are and
- how some of the options are set.
-
- Here are the available options in the User editor for every user.
- Note that it is possible to change the look of the User editor
- by editing the control files. This list however is about the
- default User editor screens as supplied with Concord.
-
- | It is possible that not all options mentioned below are available
- | in the user editor, because the option might not have been
- | available in this release of Concord.
-
- 2.8.1 User editor Screen 1
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Option : Name
- Description : User name. For the default user this is
- 'Default user'. This is the name the user
- used to login with and this is used by most
- external programs when reading user
- information.
- Example : Frank Hemmelder
-
- Option : Alias
- Description : The alias the user entered (if any).
- Example : Concord doc writer
-
- Option : City
- Description : City as the user has entered it. Please note
- the difference with the address field
- explained later. This field is used by most
- external programs when reading user
- information.
- Example : Spijkenisse, NL
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 60
-
- Option : Voice
- Description : The voice phone number as entered by the
- user at logon for the first time.
- Example : +31-188059592
-
- Option : Data
- Description : The data phonenumber as entered by the user
- at logon for the first time.
- Example : +31.188059592
-
- Option : Birthday
- Description : Users birthday in the format MM-DD-YY. This
- format is independent from what the user
- select inside the BBS. This is the format
- Concord stores it in the userfiles.
- Example : 11-18-62
-
- Option : Sex
- Description : The type of human this person is.
- Choices : Male/Female
-
- Option : Sysop page times
- Description : Number of times the user has paged the
- Sysop.
- Example : 3
-
- Option : Public msgs
- Description : Number of public messages the user has
- written on your system.
- Example : 12
-
- Option : Private msgs
- Description : Number of private messages the user has
- written on your system.
- Example : 32
-
- Option : Upload KB
- Description : Number of kilobytes the user has uploaded to
- your system.
- Example : 1272
-
- Option : Upload files
- Description : Number of files uploaded to your system by
- this user.
- Example : 7
-
- Option : Download KB
- Description : Number of kilobytes downloaded by the user
- from your BBS.
- Example : 3682
-
- Option : Download files
- Description : Number of files the user has downloaded from
- your system.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 61
-
- Option : Deleted
- Description : Status of this user. If this field is
- showing No, the user is not marked for
- deletion. If it shows Yes, the user is
- marked for deletion. Note that this does not
- delete the user from the userlist, only
- marked the record for deletion. You will
- need to purge the userbase, see the menu
- (F10) to actually delete the user. Use SPACE
- to toggle the current setting. This field
- can also be switched on or off with the Alt-
- D key. Do not turn this option on with your
- default user!
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : SecLvl
- Description : Security level of this user. This can be
- changed by entering the new number of by
- pressing the Alt-S key while in viewing
- mode. The latter will give you a list of the
- securitylevels you specified in the
- configuration program.
- Example : 200
-
- Option : Address
- Description : Three lines for the address of the user. You
- can request this by using the macros
- available within Concord. This will be
- explained in another chapter. This info is
- not used by external programs at this time,
- since it is something unique for Concord.
- Example : P.O. Box 270
- 3200 AG Spijkenisse
- Holland
-
- Option : Screen length
- Description : The screen length the user has selected.
- Please note that when you login locally your
- screenlength is adjusted to your actual
- screen size, although you might have a
- different screenlength when calling in by
- remote.
- Example : 24
-
- Option : Password
- Description : The password the user has selected to use on
- your system. This is always hidden, unless
- you are on the field in edit mode.
- Example : ***********
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 62
-
- Option : First call
- Description : Date and time of the first call to your
- system, according to your system time. The
- format is MM-DD-YY HH:MM.
- Example : 11-23-94 17:46
-
- Option : Last call
- Description : Date and time of the last call to your
- system, according to your system time. The
- format is MM-DD-YY HH:MM. This is used by
- the purge by date command in the User editor
- to determine of the user is within the
- specified amount of days.
- Example : 11-23-95 17:46
-
- Option : Times called
- Description : Number of times the user has called your
- system.
- Example : 311
-
- Option : Minutes elapsed
- Description : Total number of minutes the user has been
- online to your system.
- Example : 2508
-
- 2.8.2 User editor Screen 2
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Option : Protocol
- Description : Default protocol for this user. The
- following numbers can be used:
-
- 0 This means that there is no default
- protocol defined. Concord will ask for
- a protocol everytime the user selects
- an up or download.
- 1 Default protocol is the first one
- defined in the protocol list.
- 2 Default protocol is the second protocol
- defined in the protocol list.
- 3 The third protocol a.s.o.
-
- Please note that when you change protocols
- the user might end up with a different
- default protocol because the pointer is
- pointing to a protocol you have changed or
- even deleted. The number is not connected to
- a specific protocol, only to the number in
- the list of protocols.
- Choices : 0,1..x (x = last number of protocol)
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 63
-
- Option : Editor
- Description : Default editor for this user. The following
- numbers can be used:
-
- 0 This means that there is no default
- editor defined. Concord will ask for an
- editor everytime the user wants to
- write a message.
- 1 Default editor is the first one defined
- in the editor list.
- 2 Default editor is the second editor
- defined in the editor list.
- 3 The third editor a.s.o.
-
- Please note that when you change editors the
- user might end up with a different default
- editor because the pointer is pointing to a
- editor you have changed or even deleted. The
- number is not connected to a specific
- editor, only to the number in the list of
- editors.
- Choices : 0,1..x (x = last number of editor)
-
- Option : Viewer
- Description : Not used at this moment.
-
- Option : Packer
- Description : Default packer for this user. The following
- numbers can be used:
-
- 0 This means that there is no default
- packer defined. Concord will ask for a
- packer everytime the user wants to
- write a message.
- 1 Default packer is the first one defined
- in the packer list.
- 2 Default packer is the second packer
- defined in the packer list.
- 3 The third packer a.s.o.
-
- Please note that when you change packers the
- user might end up with a different default
- packer because the pointer is pointing to a
- packer you have changed or even deleted. The
- number is not connected to a specific
- packer, only to the number in the list of
- packers.
- Choices : 0,1..x (x = last number of packer)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 64
-
- Option : Charset
- Description : Default character set for this user. The
- following numbers can be used:
-
- 0 This means that there is no default
- character set defined. Concord will ask
- for a character set everytime the user
- wants to write a message.
- 1 Default character set is the first one
- defined in the character set list.
- 2 Default character set is the second
- character set defined in the character
- set list.
- 3 The third character set a.s.o.
-
- Please note that when you change character
- sets the user might end up with a different
- default character set because the pointer is
- pointing to a character set you have changed
- or even deleted. The number is not connected
- to a specific character set, only to the
- number in the list of character sets.
- Choices : 0,1..x (x = last number of character set)
-
- Option : Msg packet
- Description : Default type of offline mail system used.
- This is either QWK, BlueWave or Omen. The
- following numbers can be used:
-
- 0 This means that there is no default
- type selected.
- 1..3 The available type of packets.
-
- You cannot change, add or delete a type of
- mail system, since these are built into
- Concord.
- Choices : 0..3
-
- Option : Msg area
- Description : This field contains two separate fields. The
- first is the number of the area the user has
- selected. The second field is the group name
- of that area.
- Example : 95 DAT
-
- Option : File area
- Description : This field contains two separate fields. The
- first is the number of the file area the
- user has selected. The second field is the
- group name of that area.
- Example : 134 CD1
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 65
-
- Option : Door
- Description : This field contains two separate fields. The
- first is the number of the door the user has
- selected. The second field is the group name
- of that door.
- Example : 134 CD1
-
- Option : Chat channel
- Description : Number of chatchannel the user has selected.
- This is used in the internal multinode chat.
- Example : 1
-
- Option : Read msgs type
- Description : This is the type of display the user has
- selected for reading messages. These types
- are defined at the back of the language
- files. The following numbers can be used:
-
- 0 The first display type defined.
- 1 The second display type defined.
-
- If you define more types of display for
- reading messages, this number can increase.
- Example : 0
-
- Option : File list type
- Description : The number of the file list type the user
- selected as his/her default file list type.
- These types are defined in the back of the
- language files. The following numbers can be
- used:
-
- 0 The first display type defined.
- 1 The second display type defined.
- 2 The third display type defined.
-
- If you define more types of display for
- listing files, this number can increase.
- Example : 0
-
- Option : Sysop comment
- Description : A field in the user file where you, the
- Sysop, can place a remark about the user.
- Example : Loves Concord
-
- The following statistics are only for the current day:
-
- Option : Calls
- Description : Number of calls to your system the user made
- today.
- Example : 3
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 66
-
- Option : Min elapsed
- Description : Number of minutes that the user has been
- using today.
- Example : 13
-
- Option : DL KB
- Description : Number of kilobytes downloaded today by this
- user.
- Example : 123
-
- Option : DL files
- Description : Number of files downloaded today by this
- user.
- Example : 3
-
- Option : Last packet num
- Description : Number of packages downloaded with the
- offline mail system. When a user downloads
- another packet the same day, Concord will
- increase the file extension with one, so you
- won't receive a package with the same name
- twice. The first package is called *.QWK (*
- is replaced by the name you enter in the
- configuration program), the second will be
- *.QW1, the third *.QW2 and so on.
- Example : 1
-
- Option : Sysop comment
- Description : Comment from the Sysop for this user.
- Example : Big downloader
-
- 2.8.3 User editor Screen 3
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The first part on this screen concerns the offline mail system.
-
- Option : Msg packet days
- Description : Currently not used by Concord.
-
- Option : Max msgs in packet
- Description : Maximum number of messages Concord will pack
- into one package for this user. By default
- this is the number specified in the
- configuration program, but you could change
- this for certain users.
- Example : 500
-
- Option : Include WELCOME
- Description : Is the file WELCOME.ANS included in the
- offline mail package which the user will
- download or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 67
-
- Option : Include NEWS
- Description : Is the file NEWS.ANS included in the offline
- mail package which the user will download or
- not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Include GOODBYE
- Description : Is the file GOODBYE.ANS included in the
- offline mail package which the user will
- download or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Include new files list
- Description : Is the file with a list of new files
- included in the offline mail package which
- the user will download or not. New files are
- scanned since the last time the user
- searched for new files.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Include new bulletins
- Description : Are new bulletins included in the offline
- mail package which the user will download or
- not. New bulletins are scanned since the
- last time the user scanned for bulletins.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Include last read ptrs
- Description : Is the file which contains the last read
- pointers included in the package that the
- user will download or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Want to see ALL msgs
- Description : Does this user wants to see msgs for ALL as
- personal messages or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Offline packing
- Description : Are messages packed offline during a system
- event everyday or are they only packed when
- the user is online. This option is currently
- not used by Concord.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Mark mail as received
- Description : Is mail, that has been packed for the user
- in an offline mail package, marked as
- received or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 68
-
- Option : Not include own msgs
- Description : Are messages from the user himself, answers
- and new messages, since the last time the
- offline package system was used, included in
- the mail package or not.
- Choices : No/Yes
-
- Here are some more general options.......
-
- Option : First menu
- Description : Normally a user will start at the main menu
- called TOP.MNU. But sometimes you might want
- to redirect this user to a different menu,
- or you have a special Sysop menu where you
- want to jump to straight away, then you can
- use this option. If there is a menu name
- given in this field, Concord will jump to
- that menu, instead of the normal main menu.
- An extension is not needed since menu files
- always have MNU as extension.
- Example : SYSOP
-
- Option : Language
- Description : Name of the language file that is active for
- this user. No extension needed.
- Example : DEFAULT
-
- Option : Last file check
- Description : Date of the last new files scan by this
- user. The format is MM-DD-YY.
- Example : 10-30-94
-
- Option : Last bulletin check
- Description : Date of the last bulletin check by this
- user. The format is MM-DD-YY.
- Example : 11-22-94
-
- Option : Last msgs packet
- Description : Date of the last offline message packet
- generation for this user. The format is MM-
- DD-YY.
- Example : 12-23-94
-
- Option : Expiration date
- Description : Date that the expiration for this user
- expires. When the user logs in to the
- system, a script file is run, allowing you
- to take certain actions. This field could be
- used for membership periods etc.
- Example : 07-18-97
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 69
-
- Option : Time in bank
- Description : Number of minutes that this user has in the
- internal timebank.
- Example : 120
-
- Option : DL-limit in bank
- Description : Number of kilobytes this user has in the
- internal timebank.
- Example : 1000
-
- Option : View file
- Description : Name of the file that is to be shown to this
- user when he/she logs on to your system.
- Depending on the next options this is done
- once or always. This filename can have an
- extension.
- Example : MEMBER.RIP
-
- Option : Delete after view
- Description : Is the file mentioned in the previous option
- deleted after the user has viewed it or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : File viewed
- Description : This informs you if the file has been viewed
- or not by this user. Concord changes this
- field into Yes as soon as the file is viewed
- by this user.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : View only once
- Description : Is this file to be viewed by this user only
- once or more then one time.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- 2.8.4 User editor Screen 4
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Some options for controlling Concord's behaviour.....
-
- Option : Mail check
- Description : Does this user has his/her mail check on or
- off.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : New files check
- Description : Does this user has his/her new file check on
- or off.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : New bulletins check
- Description : Does this user has his/her bulletin check on
- or off.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 70
-
- Option : Colours
- Description : Is this user using colours or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Hot keys
- Description : Is this user using hot keys or not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : No DL ratio check
- Description : Is the ratio check performed on this user or
- not.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : No kill
- Description : Is the No-kill flag turned on or not. When
- this option is on, the user can not be
- deleted from the userlist, even if the
- Delete flag in screen 1 is on. Use this for
- example for your own record and that of your
- co-sysops.
- Choices : Yes/No
-
- Option : Calls since bday chk
- Description : Number of calls since last birthday check.
- Concord will ask for a birthday verification
- after the number of days configured in CFG
- is exceeded. Then this field is reset to 0.
- Example : 5
-
- Option : Wrong passwords
- Description : Number of wrong passwords entered since last
- logon. This can be used as a safety feature
- to inform the user about any illegal
- attempts to access the system with his/her
- name. This counter is reset when a correct
- password is given.
- Example : 3
-
- Select QUIT from the menu (F10) or press ESC to exit the user
- editor and return to the installation program. The installation
- program will inform you about the actions performed and if
- everything went ok or not. Press ENTER to continue.
-
- Displayed is a list of several things that you should check
- before starting Concord.
-
- That is all folks for the installation. Now play around with
- Concord and remember:
-
- "Using Concord is fun! Trust your computer! Don't give up!"
- | - Pasi Talliniemi
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 71
-
- 2.9 Environment variable
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Make sure that you set the environment variable CONCORD in your
- batchfile or your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This variable must point to
- your main BBS directory. In our example C:\CONCORD. Setting the
- variable is done by adding the following line to your batch or
- AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
-
- SET CONCORD=C:\CONCORD\
-
- Concord needs this environment variable. It will not run without
- it.
-
- Consult your MS-Dos manual if you have trouble installing the
- variable. You can check if it is set by typing SET at your DOS
- prompt. This will give you a list of all settings and should
- include the line:
-
- CONCORD = C:\CONCORD
-
- If not, consult your DOS manual.
-
- 2.10 Conversion from SuperBBS
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The development of Concord started when SuperBBS died, or at
- least when it was clear that there would not be an update for
- some time. So it might not come as a surprise that Concord has
- a conversion utility for SuperBBS systems.
-
- What to do to convert from SuperBBS v1.17-3 (or 1.18 Beta) to
- Concord? Well, the answer is not to much, since most things are
- done by the conversion program.
-
- What you need is a SuperBBS system version 1.17-3 (or the not
- officially released for the public 1.18 Beta-1). Make sure that
- the SBBS variable is pointing to the correct directory.
-
- Unpack the main Concord archive, not the archive that comes with
- the installation program, into a temporary directory on your
- harddisk and start the installation program. The first screen is
- the information screen, informing you about the requirements for
- Concord.
-
- Press ENTER to continue. Now you will see the settings screen.
- Press SPACE so you can adjust the settings. Change the prompt
- from creating new files into the convert from SuperBBS option.
- Check if the directory name is correct and then press ESC when
- done. Press ENTER to start the installation and conversion.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 72
-
- Concord will ask if it is allowed to create the destination
- directory if it does not exist. Then it will inform you about the
- settings. If something is wrong, Concord will inform you. Press
- ENTER if everything is correct.
-
- The installation program will now install the Concord files,
- convert your SuperBBS control files, textfiles etc. to the new
- Concord format. You might see some remarks that certain codes are
- not supported by Concord, that is because not every control code
- within SuperBBS is supported in the same way in Concord. The
- installation program will also convert your userbase and other
- parts of the SuperBBS configuration to Concord formats.
-
- When everything is done, Concord will inform you that it is
- ready. Now there are some information screens about things to do,
- so read them and press ENTER to continue. In the end you will be
- back where you started from, the DOS prompt.
-
- | Please note that a menu conversion is not available at this
- | moment. There is however an utility to convert ANSI files from
- | SuperBBS into Concord format, but this is a separate utility and
- | is not included in the main Concord archive.
-
- 2.11 Checking the configuration.
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Please check your configuration! Although the conversion can
- handle most SuperBBS systems, you might have a system where the
- conversion program had some difficulties. Start the main setup
- program and go through all the options. See for an explanation
- of all options the previous part of this chapter.
-
- This is what you have to do:
-
- - Check the main configuration.
- | - Move files into the correct directories. This is needed
- | because the installation program will place all files in
- | the main directory. You might have to move the menu files,
- | the ANSI screen files and, but only if you used 1.18 Beta
- | 1, the filebase files.
- - Check the area set up for mail and file areas.
- - Check if your userbase is converted correctly.
- - Adjust the default user settings to your likings.
- | - Create your menus.
-
- Test Concord and make adjustments where needed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 73
-
- | 2.12 Manual conversion
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | If you want some more control over the conversion, it is also
- | possible to install Concord as a new system and then do the
- | conversion manually. This is done by the GENUTIL program. Run
- | GENUTIL CONVERT ? for more information on the options to convert
- | your SuperBBS configuration.
- |
- | 2.13 Conversion from other software
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | More and more external utilities are coming available. Conversion
- | from Proboard and RemoteAccess to Concord is available, although
- | these are not full conversions. Please check the support sites
- | in you country.
- |
- | 2.2 Commandline options
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | Concord has several commandline options which can change the
- | behaviour of the program. These are also used when you start the
- | BBS from a mailer in a batchfile and not directly. More then one
- | option can be used on the commandline. Most options can be
- | shortened to the first character.
- |
- | Option : -BPS:<Bps speed>
- | Shortcut : -B:<Bps speed>
- | Description : Modem speed of the connection that is
- | already there. This tells Concord that it is
- | already connected.
- |
- | Option : -DEBUG
- | Shortcut : -D
- | Description : Shows you the debug strings. When Concord is
- | running it will show you more information
- | than it does normally. This information can
- | be of use when you are having problems
- | running Concord.
- |
- | Option : -ERRLVL:<Errorlevel>
- | Shortcut : -E:<Errorlevel>
- | Description : Errorlevel to exit with after a normal exit
- | from Concord. This errorlevel will be used
- | unless a special action is performed that
- | has an other errorlevel, like writing mail,
- | which causes Concord to exit with another
- | fixed errorlevel. When this option is not
- | used, Concord exits with errorlevel 0.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 74
-
- | Option : -LOCAL
- | Shortcut : -L
- | Description : This option allows you to enter the BBS
- | locally. Concord will not look for a
- | connection, but will be starting the BBS.
- |
- | Option : -M[<Filename>]
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : Plays the musicfile that is given as the
- | filename in the background while running
- | Concord. A sound device must be present.
- |
- | Option : -MAINT
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : This option allows Concord to prepare the
- | offline message creating for the QWK system.
- | Any user that is allowed to have messages
- | generated by Concord offline, will have
- | his/her message packet prepared. You only
- | need to run this option once a day and only
- | when you use offline mail packing.
- |
- | Option : -NODE:<Nodenumber>
- | Shortcut : -N:<Nodenumber>
- | Description : This option tells Concord which node number
- | it is running. This overrides the setting in
- | the configuration file.
- |
- | Option : -NOSYSOP
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : All available Sysop keys will not be
- | available. Useful if you don't want anybody
- | use the keys on the local keyboard.
- |
- | Option : -OVRBUFSIZE:<Size in KB)
- | Shortcut : -O:<Size in KB)
- | Description : This sets the overlay buffer size to xx
- | Kilobytes. Using a larger buffersize will
- | speed up the BBS, but you will need to have
- | the memory to run it.
- |
- | Option : -PORT:<Port>
- | Shortcut : -P:<Port>
- | Description : COM port to use for the BBS system. This
- | overrides the setting in the configuration
- | file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 75
-
- | Option : -RETURN
- | Shortcut : -R
- | Description : Returns to the BBS after an exit. When using
- | this option, the user was already online,
- | but used an external program and now wants
- | to return to the BBS. Concord will not ask
- | for the username, it will only read in the
- | exitfiles and start the BBS at the same
- | place the external program was started.
- |
- | Option : -STATUSLINE:<Number>
- | Shortcut : -S:<Number>
- | Description : Tells Concord to start with a certain
- | statusline, the two lines at the bottom.
- | Using 0 will hide the statusline.
- |
- | Option : -TIME:<Time in minutes>
- | Shortcut : -T:<Time in minutes>
- | Description : This option tells Concord how much time it
- | is in minutes until the next system event.
- | This setting overrides the event settings in
- | the configuration file.
- |
- | Option : -USER:<Name>;<Password>
- | Shortcut : -U:<Name>;<Password>
- | Description : When using this option it is possible to
- | start the BBS without entering your name and
- | password. Very useful for local logins.
- |
- | Option : -WAIT
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : Concord will wait for a file called
- | CRUNNODE.<Nodenumber>. This file is created
- | by the mailer. This is useful when running
- | with a multitasker. This allows you to keep
- | the BBS running in it's DOS VDM and when
- | Concord sees the drop file, it will start.
- | This speeds up starting the BBS after the
- | escape pressing in the mailer.
- |
- | Option : -*
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : This tells Concord not to load the overlay
- | buffer into EMS memory.
- |
- | Option : /?
- | Shortcut : None
- | Description : Displays the commandline options. This
- | command can only be used as a single
- | commandline option.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 2 - Page 76
-
- Chapter 3 - Language files
- =================================================================
-
- 3.1 General information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Concord is flexible. That's what you should have found out by
- now. This flexibility is also visible in the language part of the
- program. Everything can be changed. From the lines of text
- displayed to the users up to the colours used to display them.
- Concord even allows you to define your own file list and message
- list types.
-
- You can have as many languages as you want. Just edit or create
- the language file, compile it and add it to the control list. How
- is this done and what every line in the language file means is
- explained in this chapter.
-
- 3.2 Control codes
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- There are several control codes available which you can use to
- control Concord's behaviour. You can use these control codes in
- the language files to perform certain actions. Please note that
- these control codes are entered as they appear. For example ^A;
- is entered as '^', 'A' and ';' and not by pressing the Ctrl key
- and the A key simultaneously. The ';' behind the macros is
- mandatory! This tells Concord that the macro command is finished.
-
- Options within square brackets [...] are optional.
-
- Macro : ^A;
- Description : Wait for Enter.
-
- Macro : ^B;
- Description : Backspace.
-
- Macro : ^C<fore>[,<back>];
- Description : Change colour to the colours specified in
- the <fore> and (optional) <back> values. The
- <fore> stands for the foreground colour, the
- <back> stands for the background colour. You
- can use this option with a foreground colour
- value only, or specify fore- and background
- colours. The values for the colours are as
- follows:
-
- 00 Black
- 01 Blue
- 02 Green
- 03 Cyan
- 04 Red
- 05 Purple
- 06 Brown
- 07 Grey >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 1
-
- 08 Dark grey
- 09 Light blue
- 10 Light green
- 11 Light cyan
- 12 Light red
- 13 Light purple
- 14 Yellow
- 15 White
-
- Only the colours 0 to 7 are available as
- background colours. You can also use the
- colours 16 to 31 for the same colours as
- above, except that they are blinking. You
- don't have to enter the 0 in front of the
- numbers. For example, brown is colour 6.
-
- Macro : ^CN[,N];
- Description : Return colours back to original colour. This
- macro allows you to change back to the
- colours used before the last colour change.
- The 'N' is not a number but the character
- 'N'.
-
- Macro : ^E1;
- Description : Clear screen.
-
- Macro : ^E2;
- Description : Clear line.
-
- Macro : ^E3;
- Description : Clear till end of line from cursor position.
-
- Macro : ^G<x>,<y>;
- Description : Go to position x,y. This is a physical
- screen position. The <x> stands for the
- horizontal position and the <y> stands for
- the vertical position. The top left corner
- of your screen is the 0,0 position. The top
- right corner of your screen would be
- position 80,0.
-
- Macro : ^L<length>;
- Description : Length of the answer field. This macro
- allows you to specify the length of the
- field that is available to be edited by a
- user. In general you would change the
- colours and then define the field length.
- This allows you to create answer boxes on
- screen. Two options are available here:
-
- ^L<length>,CAPIT;
-
- This tells Concord to capitalise the field
- input.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 2
-
- ^L<length>,HIDDEN;
-
- This tells Concord not to show what is being
- typed in the edit field, but replace all
- characters with stars. For example when
- asking for the password.
-
- Macro : ^M;
- Description : Line feed.
-
- Macro : ^P[<length>];
- Description : Wait <length> * 0.1 seconds. If no length is
- defined, the default of 0.5 seconds is used.
- This option allows you to pause a textline.
-
- Macro : ^S<drive:\path\filename.ext>;
- Description : Show ANSI file. You could use this option to
- display a file instead of a textline, for
- example as a time limit warning.
-
- Macro : ^^;
- Description : Use this if you need to enter a '^'
- character.
-
- | Macro : ^1<char>,^2<char> .... ^Z<char>;
- Description : Selection option. The <char> parameter is
- | replaced by a character. This allows you to
- make a selection. In most cases there is a
- line in the language file following the line
- with the selections, which is defining the
- actions to take. (See language file
- explanation for more information.)
-
- Macro : ^W;
- Description : Wait for the selection from the previous
- macro. Concord will supply the number
- corresponding to the character the user
- pressed. If you defined ^1Y^2N^3C^4S^5Q; in
- the previous macro and the user pressed C,
- Concord will supply the 3 for the action to
- perform.
-
- Macro : ^X<x>;
- Description : Moves the cursor <x> positions horizontally.
-
- Macro : ^Y<y>;
- Description : Moves the cursor <y> positions vertically.
-
- | Macro : ^]Statement;
- | Description : Macro to allow some parts of the textline to
- | be displayed only when the statement is
- | true. Any following ^] macro will cancel the
- | previous statement. See line 164 of the
- | language file for an example.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 3
-
- If you don't understand some of these macros, you can have a look
- at the examples supplied in the language file, which will make
- it easier to understand.
-
- 3.3 The language control file
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The control file, called LNG.CTL, is the place where you specify
- the languages you have available on your system. As with
- everything in Concord, you can have as many as you want.
-
- The control file is a plain ASCII file with the following format:
-
- Language_name Language description
- Language_name Language description
- Language_name Language description
-
- The language name is the name of the language file. Supplied with
- Concord is at least a file called DEFAULT.LNG. (More languages
- should/will be available.) This is a DOS filename without
- extension and should conform to the DOS filename conventions.
-
- The language description is what is shown to the user.
- Here's an example file:
-
- DEFAULT English (Normal)
- ENGWRD English (Weird language)
- SUOMI Finnish
- HOLLAND Dutch
-
- This file should be in your main Concord directory.
-
- | Please note that there is no reason why your language file should
- | be called DEFAULT.LNG. You can change it into anything you want,
- | just don't forget to change the name in the LNG.CTL file and in
- | your user editor for the DEFAULT USER.
-
- Here's a tip on designing your own language files. First copy the
- DEFAULT.LNG file to the filename you want to call your language
- file. Start the CFG program and choose editing language files.
- Then select your new language, edit the file and voila, a new
- language file is born. Remember to keep a backup of DEFAULT.LNG
- for safety, even if you don't use the file yourself, because you
- don't have to. Add the new language file to the control file and
- voila, your users can use the language.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 4
-
- 3.4 The Default language file
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Here we go with the main part of the languages, the language file
- itself. This chapter will discuss every line in the DEFAULT.LNG
- language file. In some of the lines are some macros used, which
- are replaced by Concord with information about the system, user
- or area the user is in. Please see chapter 5 for more information
- about these macros.
-
- Keys used in the language file editor:
-
- Space Used for showing how the line will look in the BBS.
- All control codes will be used.
- F1 Help screen
- F8 Msg read options
- F9 File list options
- F10 Info in the *.INF file belonging to the language file.
- (See 3.5)
- ^C Enter the default line
- A..Z Find word in language
-
- In this documentation the following format is used:
-
- Line 1 The textline as it is in the default.lng file
- Line 2 The description of the textline, including a
- description of some commands used in the line
-
- Note that line 1 is only the default text, you can use whatever
- language you want in your own language file. Appendix A will give
- you a list of all file strings used by Concord.
-
- Because of the length of some of the lines, they might not fit
- on the lines of these pages, the following convention is used to
- make clear that it is actually one line:
-
- Line 001 : This is an example of a line which ->
- will not fit on one line of ->
- this manual.
-
- The -> should not be typed when you enter a line in the language
- file editor. It is only there to tell you that the next line
- should be behind the previous one. Please note that if there is
- a space between the last character on the line and the -> symbol,
- there should be a space in the actual line.
-
- The used macros in the language files, words starting and ending
- with @, like @macro@, are explained in another chapter. Please
- refer to that part of the documentation if you have any questions
- about them.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 5
-
- Here are the textlines:
-
- Line 001 : ^C15,0;Please identify yourself, ->
- stranger:^M;^C14,1;^L35,CAPITFIRST;->
- ^M;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the users when they have to
- enter their name at logon. The colour is set
- to 15,0 which is white on black and the line
- 'Please identify yourself, stranger:' is
- displayed. Then there is a line feed and the
- colour is changed to yellow on blue. In this
- colour is the input field placed on screen
- with a length of 35 characters. The first
- character of each word is capitalised. When
- the user entered his/her name and pressed
- ENTER, the two last line feeds are entered.
- These two were behind the ^L character,
- which means they are executed after the ^L
- option is executed. (See 3.2 for information
- about the control codes.)
-
- Line 002 : ^C13,0;Let me see. At least you seem to ->
- be in our files.^M;So you are @NAME@ ->
- from @CITY@, right? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user after he/she entered
- her/his name to verify if he/she is really
- from the city which is in the userfile.
- (Because there might be somebody else with
- the same name as your user.) The colour is
- set to purple on black and the text is
- displayed on two lines, because of the ^M
- (line feed) in the textline. The two macros
- @NAME@ and @CITY@ are replaced by Concord
- with the user's name and city. See chapter
- 5 for more information on these macros. At
- the end of the line a '(Y/n)' is displayed
- (without the ') and Concord is waiting for
- the user. In this case the first option is
- hardcoded into Concord as being the 'Yes'
- and the second option is the 'No'. The
- capital is the default value, so when the
- user presses ENTER, Concord makes it a Y, or
- whatever you make of it in your own
- language. The ^W means 'wait for the
- selection' and after the user made a
- selection, Concord adds two linefeed.
-
- Line 003 : ^C15,0:Show me your pass and I might ->
- let you go.^M;^C14,1;^L15,HIDDEN;^M;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord is
- asking for the password. The ^L15,HIDDEN; is
- responsible for hiding the password when the
- user is entering it. All characters are
- replaced by the '*' character.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 6
-
- Line 004 : ^C13,0;Very well. Have a nice day.^M:
- Description : Textline shown to the user when the password
- was correct and the user is allowed to enter
- the BBS system.
-
- Line 005 : ^C13,0;Almost but not quite. You know, ->
- I - as a representative of the military->
- ^M;police - could put you in front of ->
- the execution squad because of this,^M;->
- but today feels like my lucky day, so ->
- I give you another try. Don't blow it->
- ...^M;^M;
- Description : This line is shown to the user when he/she
- entered a wrong password. It is a good
- example of how to make long lines.
- Eventhough it is only a single line in the
- language file, is shown on screen as several
- lines, because of the ^M; usage. (Remember
- ^M; represents a line feed.) You can use
- this in fact on every line which you want to
- display to the user if you can't get the
- information you want to give on one single
- line.
-
- Line 006 : ^C13,0;hahaha. GUARDS! Take this man ->
- to the hot spot and show him what a ->
- nice^M;fellows we are. Any last wish? ->
- (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- Description : This line is shown to the user when all
- password attempts have failed. The user will
- be logged off after he/she answered the
- 'Last wish' question. The Y/n is hardcoded,
- but not really used, because whatever the
- user answers, he/she is logged off.
-
- Line 007 : ^C13,0;Pardon me... You said your name ->
- was @NAME@, right? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;Yeah ->
- I knew it!^M;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when the entered name is
- not found in the userlist. Concord will
- first display the line up to the (Y/n) part,
- then wait for the user. When an answer is
- given to the question, Concord will display
- the rest of the line on a new line. The
- @NAME@ macro is replaced by the name entered
- by the user. The Y/n order is hardcoded into
- Concord.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 7
-
- Line 008 : ^15,0;^E1;Checking for new mail... ->
- (Ctrl-C to abort or Ctrl-N to jump ->
- to next area.)^M;^M;
- Description : This line is shown when the user is scanning
- for new mail (when run from the menu or from
- the WELCOME.Q-A questionnaire). The ^E1;
- means a clear screen. The Ctrl-C and Ctrl-N
- combinations are hardcoded into Concord.
-
- Line 009 : ^C11,0;@MAREA_GROUP@.03 ->
- @MAREA_NAME@^E3;^X-80;^C14,0;
- Description : This line is used by Concord to show the
- mail areas it is scanning for new mail. The
- colour is changed and then the Group name
- and area name as defined in the message area
- section of the configuration program is
- displayed for every selected area.The ^E3;
- clears the line to the end. Then with the
- ^X-80; code, the cursor is moved back 80
- positions, to the beginning of the line, the
- colour is changed again and if there is
- another area to scan, Concord restarts at
- the beginning of the line. The @MAREA_GROUP@
- and @MAREA_NAME@ are replaced by Concord
- with the group name and area name. The .03
- behind the @MAREA_GROUP@ tells Concord to
- fill out up to 3 spaces when displaying the
- group name. This means that eventhough you
- might not have three character groupnames,
- Concord will add spaces to make it three
- characters long. If you don't want the lines
- to be overwritten, you should take out the
- control code ^X-80;. This will place every
- area on a new line, because the cursor is
- not moved back. If there is mail, Concord
- will jump to text line 010. When done,
- Concord will continue with line 009 if there
- are more areas to scan. If not, Concord will
- jump to textline 012. If there is no mail
- found after all areas are scanned, textline
- 011 is displayed.
-
- Line 010 : ^C14,0;@MSG_RCVD@:01 @MSG_FROM@.25 ->
- @MSG_SUBJ@.40 @MSG_DATE@^M;
- Description : Textline to inform the user that there is a
- new message found. It displays the
- information that the message is received,
- the senders name, the message subject and
- the date the message was written. The :01
- behind the @MSG_RCVD@ macro tells Concord
- only to use 1 character position. The .25
- behind the @MSG_FROM@ macro tells Concord to
- extend the macro until it is 25 characters
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 8
-
- long. If the text to display is shorter,
- Concord will use spaces to fill out the
- rest. With this in mind we can tell that the
- @MSG_SUBJ@ macro is going to be 40
- characters long. If the information is
- longer then 40 characters, Concord will not
- display more then 40 characters (or 25 for
- the senders name in this example).
-
- Line 011 : ^C12,0;^M;Sorry, no new mail found. ->
- Press ENTER to continue.^M;^A;
- Description : Shown to the user when no personal new mail
- was found after doing a mail scan.
-
- Line 012 : ^C15,0;^M;Do you want to read your ->
- mail now? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when there was new
- mail for the user and Concord asks him/her
- if he/she wants to read it now. The First
- option ~1 means Yes, the second ~2 means no.
- The characters 'Y' and 'n' can be replaced
- by the characters in your own language.
-
- Line 013 : Yeah!
- Description : Textline meaning 'Yes'. This is used by
- Concord everytime there should be a positive
- answer to a question or option.
-
- Line 014 : Nah...
- Description : Textline defining the response when Concord
- needs to display a 'No'.
-
- Line 015 : Male
- Description : Textline to define the word for a male
- person.
-
- Line 016 : Female
- Description : Textline to define the word for a female
- person.
-
- Line 017 : ^C15,0;No messages found. Press ENTER ->
- to continue.^A;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when there are no
- messages in the current area and the user
- selected a command to read or scan for
- messages.
-
- Line 018 : ^X-79;^C14,1;@FAREA_NUM@:05 @FAREA_GR->
- OUP.03 @FAREA_NAME@^E3;^C15,0;
- Description : Shown to the user when he/she does a new
- files scan, searches for files or
- descriptions. This line is the line that
- displays the area number, the area group and
- the area name.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 9
-
- Line 019 : ^X-79;^C15,0;^E3;
- Description : Clears the current line. The ^X-79 moves the
- cursor to the beginning of the line, the
- colour is then set to white on black and the
- line is cleared. This is used for example
- when scanning for new messages when a line
- needs to be cleared.
-
- Line 020 : ^C15,0;^M;No files found.^E3;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when there are no files
- found in either the new files list, files
- list and the search for files and keywords.
-
- Line 021 : ^C12,0;Viewing file @FILE_NAME_EXT@ ->
- dated on @FILE_DATE_SMALL@^M;
- Description : Shown when viewing a file as the top line,
- telling you which file you are viewing. This
- can be a text file or an archived file.
-
- Line 022 : ^C14,0;@VIEW_FILENAME@.12 ^C7,0;->
- @VIEW_COMPMETHOD@.15 ^C11,0;->
- @VIEW_ORIGSIZE@:07 ^C9,0;->
- @VIEW_COMPSIZE@;07 ^C10,0;->
- @VIEW_FILEDATE@^M;
- Description : This line is used when Concord displays the
- information about the file you are viewing,
- when the file you want to view is a
- compressed file. Concord uses this line for
- every file included in the archive. It shows
- the filename, compression method, original
- file size, compressed file size and the date
- of the file inside the archive.
-
- Line 023 : ^C7,0;%1 ^C15,0;%2 ^C14,0;%3^M;
- Description : This is the list format when viewing files
- in binary mode. %1 is the file position, %2
- is the HEX listing and %3 is the ASCII
- listing.
-
- Line 024 : ^C15,0;Search files by keyword (/ALL->
- =all areas, /COMB=comb. areas, none=->
- curr. area) :^M;^C14,1;^L79;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she is using
- the keyword file search option.
-
- Line 025 : ^C15,0;Search files by filemask (/ALL->
- =all areas, /COMB=comb. areas, none=->
- curr. area) :^M;^C14,1;^L79;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she is using
- the filemask file search option.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 10
-
- Line 026 : ^C15,0;Search new files by date ->
- (@CURRDATEFMT@) : ^C14,1;^L8;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : This line is used when a new files scan is
- about to be performed and the user has to
- enter the date as of which the file scan is
- to start.
-
- Line 027 : ^C12,1; String not found! Press ENTER.->
- ^E3;^A;
- Description : Shown to the user when a search was done in
- the area select screens, files and messages,
- and the string entered was not found.
-
- Line 028 : 02,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@FAREA_NUM@:5@FAREA_->
- COMB@:01 @FAREA_GROUP@.03 @FAREA_->
- NAME@.25 ^M;
- Description : This line is replaced by Concord with the
- file area names in the file area select
- screen. Here is an explanation of the first
- four characters:
-
- 1st: Number of columns in the arealist
- 2nd: Force draw of all lines in list.
- This can be Y(es) or N(o).
- 3rd: Jump directly to wanted position.
- This can be Y(es) or N(o).
- 4th: Line can be cleared with 'Clreol'
- command. Clreol is clear end of
- line. This can be Y(es) or N(o).
-
- Line 029 : 01,37,014,112;^C14,0;@FAREA_NUM@:5->
- @FAREA_COMB@:01 @FAREA_GROUP@.03 ->
- @FAREA_NAME@.25
- Description : This line is used to display the current
- file area in the file area selection list.
- here is an explanation of the first four
- characters:
-
- 1st: Cursor X position
- 2nd: Cursor length
- 3rd: Cursor off colour
- 4th: Cursor on colour
-
- When displaying the area list, line 28 is
- used to display all areas that are available
- to the user (Cursor OFF), and line 29 is
- used to display the area that is currently
- selected by showing an inverse line. (Cursor
- ON)
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 11
-
- Line 030 : 013,032,081,063,067,084
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- file area selection screen. If you want to
- use different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. A list of scan codes
- can be found in your printer or MS-Dos
- manual. Appendix B lists the scan codes for
- the keys that are normally not listed in
- your printer or MS-Dos manual. The keys are
- listed in the order they are in, the default
- is entered in brackets:
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the area. By default
- it is the RETURN key. Key code 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a string. By default this
- is the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the area selection and
- returns you to the area you were in
- when you selected the file area
- selection option. By default the Q key.
- Key code 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- By default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063. The helpfile is called
- SELFAREA.ANS and should be in your
- textfile directory or the main Concord
- directory.
-
- - 5th field (067)
-
- This field selects if this field is a
- combined area or not. Combined areas
- are marked with an asterisk behind the
- file area number. By default this is
- the C key. Key code 067. You can switch
- combined areas on or off in the file
- area configuration.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 12
-
- - 6th field (084)
-
- This field allows you to set the
- command character for setting more then
- one combined area at the same time.
- This command will display the question
- 'Set combined areas :'. By default this
- is the T key. key code 084.
-
- Some of these codes are not by default
- displayed on the line at the bottom of the
- | screen, textline 034. If you do want to
- | display the commands on the textline, edit
- | line 034.
-
- Line 031 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the file area
- select screen.
-
- Line 032 : 04;^C13,1; Enter area number : ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of an area to jump to in the file
- area select screen.
-
- Line 033 : ^G1,1^C15,1; NUM GROUP NAME ->
- ^C15,1; ^C15,1 NUM GROUP ->
- NAME^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : This is the white text and blue bar on top
- of the file area selection screen.
-
- Line 034 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; ENTER/num: Select ->
- area, SPACE: Find, C: Combined or Q: ->
- Cancel.^E3;
- Description : Line shown at the bottom of the file area
- selection screen, telling the user which
- options are available.
-
- Line 035 : ^C13,0;^E3;^M; Enter new area number : ->
- ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Fast mode selecting of the areanumber to
- jump to or shown when FILEAREA.ANS is found
- and displayed.
-
- Line 036 : 02,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@MAREA_NUM@:5@MAREA_->
- COMB@:01@MAREA_SCAN@:01@FAREA_GROUP@->
- .03 @FAREA_NAME@.25 ^M;
- Description : This line is replaced by Concord with the
- message area names in the message area
- select screen. (Like line 28 for the file
- areas.) A definition of the codes 02,Y,Y,Y
- is given in line 29.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 13
-
- Line 037 : 01,37,014,112;^C14,0;@MAREA_NUM@:5->
- @MAREA_COMB@:01@MAREA_SCAN@:01->
- @MAREA_GROUP@.03 @MAREA_NAME@.25
- Description : This line is the inverse line in the message
- area selection screen. (Like line 29 for the
- file areas.) A definition of the codes
- 01,37,014,112 is given in line 29.
-
- Line 038 : 013,032,081,063,067,077,084
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- message area selection screen. If you want
- to use different keys for the options, this
- is where you change them. You can find the
- key codes in your printer manual, most DOS
- manuals and the special ones are listed in
- the appendix of this manual. This is the
- order they are in, the default is entered in
- brackets:
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the area. By default
- it is the RETURN key. Key code 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a string. By default this
- is the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the area selection and
- returns you to the area you were in
- when you selected the message area
- selection option. By default the Q key.
- Key code 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- By default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063. The helpfile is called
- SELMAREA.ANS and should be in your
- textfile directory or the main Concord
- directory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 14
-
- - 5th field (067)
-
- This field selects if this field is a
- combined area or not. Combined areas
- are marked with an asterisk behind the
- message area number. By default this is
- the C key. Key code 067. You can switch
- combined areas on or off in the message
- area configuration.
-
- - 6th field (077)
-
- This field marks the areas for the
- mailscan. This is shown in the area
- selection list by an asterisk in front
- of the group. In the mail area
- selection lists there are two possible
- asterisk visible, one for the combined
- setting and one for the mailscan. By
- default this is the M key. Key code
- 077.
-
- - 7th field (084)
-
- This field allows you to set the
- command character for setting more then
- one combined area at the same time.
- This command will display the question
- 'Set combined areas :'. By default this
- is the T key. key code 084.
-
- Some of these codes are not by default
- displayed on the line at the bottom of the
- screen, textline 042.
-
- Line 039 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the message area
- select screen.
-
- Line 040 : 04;^C13,1; Enter area number : ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of an area to jump to in the message
- area select screen.
-
- Line 041 : ^G1,1^C15,1; NUM GROUP NAME ->
- ^C15,1; ^C15,1 NUM GROUP ->
- NAME^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : This is the white text and blue bar on top
- of the message area selection screen.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 15
-
- Line 042 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; ENTER/num: Select ->
- area, SPACE: Find, C: Combined, M: ->
- Mailscan or Q: Cancel.^E3;
- Description : Line shown at the bottom of the message area
- selection screen, telling the user which
- options are available.
-
- Line 043 : ^C13,0;^E3;^M; Enter new area number : ->
- ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Message area selection prompt for selecting
- a message area when MESSAREA.ANS is found or
- when selecting an area in 'fast' mode.
-
- Line 044 : ^C14,0;Press ^C15,1; ENTER ^C14,0; ->
- to continue.^E3;^A;^X-40;^E3;
- Description : Shown to the user when he/she has to press
- ENTER.
-
- Line 045 : ^C15,0;Which file(s) to view (wildcards ->
- allowed) : ^C14,1;^L15;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when he/she selected the
- view file menu option and Concord wants to
- know which file(s) to view.
-
- Line 046 : ^C15,0;^E1;
- Description : This is the file list header. It is always
- displayed before listing files. By default
- it only clears the screen.
-
- Line 047 : ^C14,1; (D) Down (U) Up (S) Stop ->
- (C) Continuous (A) Again (F) Flag ->
- (V) View^E3;^X-65;
- Description : This is the line which is displayed at the
- bottom of the screen while doing a file
- listing. The keys itself are defined in
- textline 048.
-
- Line 048 : 068,085,083,067,065,336,328,032,->
- 070,086,069,060,062,339
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- file listing screen. If you want to use
- different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. See appendix B for a
- list of the more exotic scan codes. The keys
- are listed in the order they are in, the
- default scan code is entered in brackets:
-
- - 1st field (068)
-
- This is the field for the key that
- means down. This will display the next
- screen in the filelisting. By default
- this is the D key. Key code 068.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 16
-
- - 2nd field (085)
-
- This is the field for the key that
- means up. This will display the
- previous page of the filelisting. By
- default this is the U key. Key code
- 085.
-
- - 3rd field (083)
-
- This is the field for the key that
- means stop. This will abort the listing
- and return you to the menu you came
- from. By default this is the S key. Key
- code 083.
-
- - 4th field (067)
-
- This is the field for the key that
- means continuous. This will list the
- files in the filelist without stopping.
- By default this is the C key. Key code
- 067.
-
- - 5th field (065)
-
- This is the field for the again key.
- This means that Concord will display
- the same page of the file listing
- again. By default this is the A key.
- Key code 065.
-
- - 6th field (336)
-
- This is the field for the page down
- command. By default this is the PgDn
- key. Key code 336.
-
- - 7th field (328)
-
- This is the field for the page up
- command. By default this is the PgUp
- key. Key code 328.
-
- - 8th field (032)
-
- This is the field that also acts as the
- file tagging key. Field 9 can also be
- used for this. By default this is the
- spacebar. Key code 032.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 17
-
- - 9th field (070)
-
- This is the second field for defining
- a file tag key. This is by default the
- F key. Key code 070.
-
- - 10th field (086)
-
- This field is for defining the key that
- makes Concord view a file while in the
- file list. By default this is the V
- key. Key code 086.
-
- - 11th field (069)
-
- This field defines the key that let's
- you edit the filedescription of the
- file which is highlighted. By default
- this is the E key. Key code 069.
-
- - 12th field (060)
-
- This field defines the key that makes
- Concord jump to the previous page of
- the file listing (if there is any). By
- default this is the < key. Key code
- 060.
-
- - 13th field (062)
-
- This field defines the key that makes
- Concord jump to the next page of the
- file listing (if there is any). By
- default this is the > key. Key code
- 062.
-
- - 14th field (339)
-
- This field defines the key for the
- delete command. This allows you to
- delete a file from the file list. This
- option is only available to users with
- Sysop level. By default this is the DEL
- key. Key code 339.
-
- Please note that some of these keys are not
- mentioned in the line displayed to the
- users. (Line 047) But you can edit that
- line, so you can incorporate everything you
- want, as long as you stay within 80
- characters.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 18
-
- Line 049 : ^C12,0;Not enough time (@TIME_LEFT@ ->
- min) or download limit (@LIMIT_LEFT@k) ->
- left to download^M;all tagged files.^M;->
- ^C15,0;Press Enter.^A;^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when the user has
- not enough time or kilobytes left to
- download all the files the user tagged.
-
- Line 050 : ^C12,0;Not enough ratio to download all ->
- tagged files. You should upload first.->
- ^M;^C15,0;Press Enter.^A;^M;
- Description : Text shown to the user when he/she has not
- the correct upload/download ratio to
- download the files he/she wants.
-
- Line 051 : ^C14,1;@FAREA_NUM@:05 @FAREA_GROUP@->
- .03 @FAREA_NAME@.25^E3;^C14,0;^M;
- Description : The blue bar with white text displaying the
- area name, group and number when searching
- for files.
-
- Line 052 : ^C15,0;More? (~1Yes/~2No/~3Cont/~4Back->
- ~6/~5Line) ^W;^X-40;^E3;^CN,N;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord when the user is
- viewing a file or text and Concord has
- reached the end of the screen and wants to
- know what to do next. The responses are
- hardcoded into Concord. However the key that
- follows the code is the character that needs
- to be pressed to activate the option.
- Pressing N in the above textline will result
- in a No option in Concord. Here are the
- options for this line:
-
- ~1 - means Yes
- ~2 - means No
- ~3 - means Continuous
- ~4 - means previous page
- ~5 - means show next line
- ~6 - is not used
-
- Line 053 : 02,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@DOOR_NUM@:05 @DOOR_->
- GROUP@.03 @DOOR_NAME@.25 ^M;
- Description : This line is the textline that displays the
- available doors in the door selection
- screen. (Like line 28 for the file areas.)
- A definition of the codes 02,Y,Y,Y is given
- at line 28.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 19
-
- Line 054 : 01,37,014,112;^C14,0;@DOOR_NUM@:05 ->
- @DOOR_GROUP@.03 @DOOR_NAME@.25
- Description : This line is the inverse line in the door
- selection screen. (Like line 29 for the file
- areas.) A definition of the codes
- 01,37,014,112 is given at line 29.
-
- Line 055 : 013,032,081,063,067
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- doors selection screen. If you want to use
- different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. This is the order
- they are in, the default is entered in
- brackets:
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the door. By default
- it is the RETURN key. Key code 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a string. By default this
- is the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the door selection and
- returns you to the menu you were in
- when you selected the door selection
- option. By default the Q key. Key code
- 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- By default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063. The helpfile is called
- SELDAREA.ANS and should be in your
- textfile directory or the main Concord
- directory.
-
- - 5th field (067)
-
- This field selects if this field is a
- combined door or not. Combined doors
- are marked with an asterisk behind the
- door number. By default this is the C
- key. Key code 067. You can switch
- combined doors on or off in the doors
- configuration.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 20
-
- Line 056 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the door select
- screen.
-
- Line 057 : 04;^C13,1; Enter door number : ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of a door to jump to in the door
- select screen.
-
- Line 058 : ^G1,1^C15,1; NUM GROUP NAME ->
- ^C15,1; ^C15,1 NUM GROUP ->
- NAME^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : This is the white text and blue bar on top
- of the door selection screen.
-
- Line 059 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; ENTER/num: Select ->
- door, SPACE: Find or Q: Cancel.^E3;
- Description : Line shown at the bottom of the door
- selection screen, telling the user which
- options are available.
-
- Line 060 : ^C13,0;^E3;^M; Enter new door number : ->
- ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Prompt displayed by Concord when the user
- selects a door in 'Fast' mode or when the
- file DOORAREA.ANS is found.
-
- Line 061 : ^C15,0; Enter files to flag : ^C14,1;->
- ^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Used by the tagfile menutype. This is
- currently not used by Concord.
-
- Line 062 : ^C13,1; Enter files to view : ^E3;->
- ^L12;^X-40;
- Description : Shown to the user at the bottom of the
- screen when he/she selected the file view
- option in the file list.
-
- Line 063 : ^C13,1; Enter files to flag : ^C14,1;->
- ^L12;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user at the bottom line of the
- screen, when he/she pressed the key that
- means tag a file in the filelist. This line
- is not shown to the user when he/she uses
- the spacebar to tag a file. The file that is
- currently highlighted will be the default
- choice and placed behind the question.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 21
-
- Line 064 : ^C14,1; No files found! Press ENTER ->
- to continue. ^E3;^A;^X-45;
- Description : Shown to the user when there was no file
- found that matched the entered information
- at the questions in line 062 and line 063.
- This line is displayed in the bottom line of
- the file listing.
-
- Line 065 : ^C15,0;Enter reason to yell Sysop : ->
- ^C14,1;^L40;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when he/she wants to page
- the sysop for a chat and Concord asks for
- the reason.
-
- Line 066 : ^C13,0;Yelling Sysop for ^C15;%1^C13; ->
- seconds. Press (^C14;~1S^C13;) to ->
- abort.^W;^X-60;^E3;^N;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord is
- yelling the Sysop. The %1 is replaced by the
- number of seconds Concord will yell. The ~1
- character will abort the yell.
-
- Line 067 : ^C15,0;Enter filename to unpack to ->
- temp directory ; ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown when Concord wants to know which file
- to unpack to the temporary directory.
-
- Line 068 : ^C15,0;Which file to unpack? (Wildcards ->
- valid, Enter when ready, /? to view)->
- ^M;^C14,1;^L79;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when Concord wants to know
- which file to unpack from the file in the
- temporary directory.
-
- Line 069 : ^C15,0;Enter filename to copy to ->
- temp directory : ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Concord displays this line when the user
- selects to copy a file to the temporary
- directory.
-
- Line 070 : ^C15,0;Enter filename to pack files in ->
- temp directory : ^C14,1;^L8;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Textline displayed when Concord wants to
- know to which file to pack the files in the
- temporary directory.
-
- Line 071 : ^C15,0;Which files to pack? (Wildcards ->
- valid, Enter when ready)^M;^C14,1;^L79;->
- ^C15,0:^M;
- Description : Line of text shown to the user when Concord
- asks for the file to be packed inside the
- new archive from line 070.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 22
-
- Line 072 : ^C15,0;Enter filename(s) to erase in ->
- temp directory ; ^C14,1;^l12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Concord shows this line when it needs to
- know which files to delete from the
- temporary directory.
-
- Line 073 : ^C15,0;List files in temp directory ->
- (Wildcards valid) : ^C14,1;^L12;->
- ^C15,0;^M;
- Description : This line is shown by Concord when the user
- uses the list command for the temporary
- directory.
-
- Line 074 : ^C15,0;View file in temp directory : ->
- ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : When the user wants to view a file in the
- temporary directory, this textline is shown
- by Concord to ask for the filename.
-
- Line 075 : ^C15,0;%1.12 ^C14,0;%2:08 ^C12,0;%3 %4^M;
- Description : Line used to display the filelist in the
- temporary directory. The %1 is replaced by
- the filename, the %2 is the filesize, %3 the
- date of the file and %4 the time.
-
- Line 076 : ^C13,0;Total of %1 files (%2 bytes). ->
- Free disk space %5 bytes.^M;
- Description : Textline shown at the bottom of the
- temporary directory file list, informing you
- about the amount of files and diskspace
- used. %1 is the number of files, %2 the
- total size of these files and %5 the amount
- of free diskspace.
-
- Line 077 : DIR
- Description : Used by Concord when listing a DOS directory
- to indicate that it is a directory.
-
- Line 078 : <empty>
- Description : String shown to the user when the Sysop has
- configured 'No Yell device' in the
- configuration part of the program, so that
- the user knows that no music is played at
- the Sysop side.
-
- Line 079 : ^M;^C13,0;System operator is here...^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user at the beginning
- of a chat with the Sysop.
-
- Line 080 : ^M;^C13,0;System operator was here...^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user at the end of a
- chat with the Sysop.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 23
-
- Line 081 : ^C12,0;20 seconds until inactivity ->
- hangup!^M;
- Description : Shown to the user 20 seconds before Concord
- will disconnect because there was no
- response from the remote keyboard. You can
- set this time in the main configuration part
- of the program.
-
- Line 082 : ^C12,0;User inactive - so long...^M;
- Description : Shown to the user at the moment Concord
- disconnects because there was no activity
- from the user.
-
- Line 083 : ^C12,0;less then 2 minutes left!^M;
- Description : Concord shows this line to the user when
- he/she has 2 minutes time left for the call.
-
- Line 084 : ^C12,0;^M;^M;Time limit exceeded - see ->
- you tomorrow!^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when Concord
- disconnects, because the user has no time
- left for the day.
-
- Line 085 : ^C15,0;Enter filename(s) to move : ->
- ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown by Concord when it needs to know which
- file(s) to move.
-
- Line 086 : ^M;^C13,0;Password required : ^C14,1;->
- ^L15,HIDDEN;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : When a user or you wants to enter somewhere
- and there is a password set, this line will
- appear to ask for the password. The HIDDEN
- means that Concord will replace the
- characters typed by asterisk.
-
- Line 087 : ^C12,0;Password failure!^M;
- Description : Textline showing that the entered password
- was not correct.
-
- Line 088 : ^C15,0;Ok.^M;
- Description : Textline showing the fact that the password
- was correctly entered.
-
- Line 089 : 01,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@MSG_NUM@:05 ->
- @MSG_PRIV@:01 @MSG_FROM@.15 ->
- @MSG_TO@.15 @MSG_SUBJ@.23 ->
- @MSG_RCVD@:01 @MSG_DATE@:09^E3;^M;
- Description : This line is the line used to display the
- messages in the list messages command.
- Concord will use this line to display all
- messages available in the area. (Like line
- 28 in the file selection screen.) The codes
- 01,Y,Y,Y are explained in line 28.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 24
-
- Line 090 : 01,79,014,112:MSG_NUM@:05
- Description : Used by Concord as the inverse line in the
- quickscan message selection screen. (Same
- function as line 29 for the file area
- selection.) The codes 01,79,014,112 are
- explained in line 29.
-
- Line 081 : 013,032,081,063,077
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- message list screen. If you want to use
- different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. You can find the key
- codes in your printer manual, most DOS
- manuals and the most commonly used are
- listed in the appendix of this manual. This
- is the order they are in, the default is
- entered in brackets:
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the message and let
- Concord go into message view mode. By
- default it is the RETURN key. Key code
- 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a string. By default this
- is the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the message list and
- returns you to the menu you were in
- when you selected the message list
- option. By default the Q key. Key code
- 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- This help file is called SELMSG.ANS. By
- default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063.
-
- - 5th field (077)
-
- This key marks messages in the list
- which you can then read with the read
- marked menu option. By default this is
- the M key. Key code 077.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 25
-
- Line 092 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the message list
- screen.
-
- Line 093 : 04;^C13,1; Enter msg number to jump : ->
- ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of a message to jump to in the
- message list screen.
-
- Line 094 : ^G1,1^C15,1; NUM X FROM ->
- TO SUBJ ->
- RCVD DATE^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : This is the white text and blue bar on top
- of the message list screen.
-
- Line 095 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; Press ENTER to ->
- select msg, SPACE to find msg or Q to ->
- cancel.^E3;
- Description : Line shown at the bottom of the messages
- list screen, telling the user which options
- are available.
-
- Line 096 : ^X-79;^C14,1;@MAREA_NUM@:05 ->
- @MAREA_GROUP@.03 @MAREA_NAME@->
- ^E3;^C15,0;
- Description : Used by Concord when scanning areas in, for
- example, reading messages in combined areas.
-
- Line 097 : ^C15,0;File to upload (Enter to stop) ->
- : ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she selected
- the upload command and Concord wants to know
- which file(s) are going to be uploaded to
- the system.
-
- Line 098 : ^C14,0;Enter descriptions for files to ->
- upload^M;
- Description : Textline shown when Concord wants to know
- what the file description is of the file
- that is going to be uploaded.
-
- Line 099 : ^X-79;^E3;^C12,0;%1.12 ^C14,1;^L60;^C15,0;
- Description : Line used by Concord as the line with the
- filename and the place to enter the
- filedescription when doing an upload. This
- line is shown below textline 098 and is used
- for every file to be uploaded. It will
- display the filename and then the field
- where the user can enter the
- filedescription. The %1 is replaced with the
- filename.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 26
-
- Line 100 : ^X-79;^E3; ^C14,1;^L60;^C15,0;
- Description : Used by Concord as the second and following
- lines of the file description. Concord only
- shows the filename on the first line of the
- file description when a user is entering
- descriptions. This is in textline 099. For
- the rest of the description, Concord will
- display the line as it appears here.
-
- Line 101 : ^C15,0;Next file in transfer queue : ->
- ^C12,0;%1^15,0;.
- Description : Textline informing the user which file is
- expected by Concord as the next file to be
- uploaded.
-
- Line 102 : Press Ctrl-R to redraw screen, Ctrl-W ->
- to clear window, Ctrl-Z to end chat.
- Description : Shown in the chat window informing you and
- the user about the keys available while in
- chat. (It starts with a space.)
-
- Line 103 : ^C15,0;Online message from %1 on node ->
- %2 :^M;^C14,0;
- Description : Textline informing the user that there is a
- message from on of the other lines. The %1
- is replaced by the name of the sender, the
- %2 is replaced by the node number.
-
- Line 104 : 01,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@WHO_NUM@:05 @WHO_NAME@->
- .25 @WHO_CITY@.25 @WHO_BPSRATE@:05 ->
- @WHO_WHATDONE@^E3;^M;
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the people
- online on all nodes when the user uses this
- menu function. It shows the node the user is
- on, the name of the user, the city, the Bps
- rate and what he/she has done.
-
- Line 105 : 01,37,014,112;^C14,0;@WHO_NUM@:05 ->
- @WHO_NAME@.25 @WHO_CITY@.25 ->
- @WHO_BPSRATE@:05 @WHO_WHATDONE@^E3;
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the people
- online on all nodes when the user uses this
- menu function. It shows the node the user is
- on, the name of the user, the city, the Bps
- rate and what he/she has done.
-
- Line 106 : 013,032,081,063
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- node list screen. If you want to use
- different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. This is the order
- they are in, the default is entered in
- brackets:
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 27
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the node number to
- which you want to sent a online
- message. By default this is the RETURN
- key. Key code 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a node. By default this
- is the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the node list and
- returns you to the menu you were in
- when you selected the node list option.
- By default the Q key. Key code 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- By default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063.
-
- Line 107 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the node list
- screen.
-
- Line 108 : 04;^C13,1; Enter node number : ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of a node to sent an online message
- to.
-
- Line 109 : ^G1,1;^C15,1; NODE NAME ->
- CITY BPS ->
- DURWQYN^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : Textline above the list of nodes when the
- user is viewing the other users on-line. The
- DURWQYN stands for:
-
- D - Download
- U - Upload
- R - Read message
- W - Write message
- Q - Offline mail system
- Y - Yelled Sysop
- N - New user
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 28
-
- Concord displays a '-' if the user didn't
- use this option in the BBS and a 'X' if the
- user did one of the options. You could have
- a list like this: X-X-----, which would mean
- that the user did a download and read a
- message.
-
- Line 110 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; Press ENTER or ->
- node number to sent msg, Space to find ->
- node or Q to cancel.^E3;
- Description : Text at the bottomline of the screen in the
- node list screen informing the user about
- the options available. Not all options are
- by default on this line. See for keys that
- are active textline 106.
-
- Line 111 : DOWN
- Description : When Concord shows the status of the other
- nodes and the node is down, this line is
- shown.
-
- Line 112 : Waiting for call
- Description : Same as in 111, but line is waiting for a
- call.
-
- Line 113 : Doing nothing special
- Description : Same as in 111, but user is in a menu or
- doing something that is not listed in one of
- the options.
-
- Line 114 : Downloading file(s)
- Description : Same as in 111, but user is downloading a
- file.
-
- Line 115 : Uploading file(s)
- Description : Same as in 111, but now the user is
- uploading a file.
-
- Line 116 ; Reading message(s)
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is reading
- messages.
-
- Line 117 : Writing message
- Description : Same as in 111, but user is writing a
- message.
-
- Line 118 : Chatting with %1
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is chatting
- with somebody. The %1 is replaced by the
- name of the user or Sysop.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 29
-
- Line 119 : Using door %1
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is using a
- external program. The %1 is replaced by the
- name of the door.
-
- Line 120 : Logging in
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is logging in
- to the system.
-
- Line 121 : Using QWK/OMEN offline msg system
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is using the
- offline mail system.
-
- Line 122 : Browsing filelist
- Description : Same as in 111, but the user is browsing the
- file lists.
-
- Line 123 : 01,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@BBSLIST_NUM@:05 ->
- @BBSLIST_NAME@.25 @BBSLIST_BPSRATE@:05->
- @BBSLIST_NUMBER@.15 BBSLIST_OPEN@.11->
- @BBSLIST_VERIFIED@^E3;^M;
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the BBS list
- when the user selects the BBSlist option.
-
- Line 124 : 01,79,014,112;@BBSLIST_NUM@:05 ->
- @BBSLIST_NAME@.25 @BBSLIST_BPSRATE@:05->
- @BBSLIST_NUMBER@.15 BBSLIST_OPEN@.11->
- @BBSLIST_VERIFIED@^E3;
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the BBS list
- when the user selects the BBSlist option.
-
- Line 125 : 013,032,081,063
- Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- keyboard for the various functions in the
- BBS list screen. If you want to use
- different keys for the options, this is
- where you change them. This is the order
- they are in, the default is entered in
- brackets:
-
- - 1st field (013)
-
- This field selects the BBS from which
- you want to see the extended
- information. By default this is the
- RETURN key. Key code 013.
-
- - 2nd field (032)
-
- This field executes the question for
- searching for a BBS. By default this is
- the SPACE. Key code 032.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 30
-
- - 3rd field (081)
-
- This field quits the BBS list and
- returns you to the menu you were in
- when you selected the BBS list option.
- By default the Q key. Key code 081.
-
- - 4th field (063)
-
- This field brings up the help screen.
- By default this is the ? key. Key code
- 063.
-
- Line 126 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- Description : Question shown to the user when he/she wants
- to search for a string in the BBS list
- screen.
-
- Line 127 : 04;^C13,1; Enter record number : ^E3;^L5;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she enters a
- number of a BBS he/she wants to see the
- extended BBS info.
-
- Line 128 : ^G1,1;^C15,1; NUM NAME ->
- BPS PHONENUMBER OPEN ->
- VERIFIED^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : Line shown above the bulletin boards list,
- explaining what the information is that is
- displayed by Concord.
-
- Line 129 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; Press ENTER or ->
- number to view BBS info, SPACE to find ->
- BBS or Q to cancel.^E3;
- Description : Line shown at the bottom of the BBS list,
- telling the user which options are
- available.
-
- Line 130 : ^C15,0;Menu is open daily from %1 to %2.->
- ^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when the user
- wants to access a menu that is closed
- because of the times you defined. The %1 is
- replaced by the opening time, the %2 is
- replaced by the closing time.
-
- Line 131 : ^C15,0;You are the first caller today!^M;
- Description : When a user views the today's callers list
- and he/she is the first user, this line is
- shown.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 31
-
- Line 132 : 02;^E1;^C14,1; Node Name ->
- City Bps Logon ->
- Logoff DURWQYN^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- Description : Textline shown above the callers lists. The
- 02 means how many lines the header (1 line)
- and the more prompt (1 line) takes. This
- line is used for the last caller list and
- for the today's callers list, explaining the
- user what is displayed. For an explanation
- of the DURWQYN, please see the description
- of textline 109.
-
- Line 133 : ^C7,0; @LAST_NODE@:04 ^C15,0;@LAST_NAME@->
- .20 ^C14,0;@LAST_CITY@.25 ^C13,0;@LAST_->
- BPSRATE@:05 ^C12,0;@LAST_LOGONTIME@:05 ->
- @LAST_LOGOFFTIME@:05 ^C10,0;@LAST_WHAT->
- DONE@^M;
- Description : Concord will replace the macro codes in this
- textline with the needed information to
- create the last caller and today's callers
- lists. This line is the line with the
- usernames and when they logged on and off
- and what they did.
-
- Line 134 : Local
- Description : Textline used by Concord when the baudrate
- of the caller was 0, in other words a local
- call. Concord will use this textline instead
- of putting a 0 in the last callers and
- today's callers lists underneath the BPS
- rate. Please note that this line should not
- have more then 5 characters.
-
- Line 135 : ^C15,0;Your time left is reduced due to ->
- approaching system event (at @NEXT_EVENT@->
- ).^M;
- Description : Shown to the user at logon when the time
- online is adjusted because there is an event
- coming up.
-
- Line 136 : ^C15,0;Your calls per day limit has ->
- been exceeded. Call again tomorrow. ->
- Bye...^M;
- Description : Concord will show this line to users who
- exceeded their daily call limit as set in
- the limits. After showing this line, Concord
- will disconnect.
-
- Line 137 : ^C15,0;^M;Which message editor do you ->
- want to use?^M;
- Description : Textline shown when Concord needs to know
- which editor the user wants to use.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 32
-
- Line 138 : ^C14,0;@EDITOR_KEY@^C7; - ^C11;->
- @EDITOR_NAME@^M;
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the
- available message editors. Used together
- with line 137.
-
- Line 139 : ^C10,0;^M;@EDITOR_NAME@ selected.^M;
- Description : Textline used by Concord to inform the user
- which editor he/she selected.
-
- Line 140 : ^C12,0;You do not have write rights ->
- to area @MAREA_NAME@.^M;
- Description : When a user selects the write message
- command in an area he/she has no rights to
- write a message, Concord will display this
- textline.
-
- Line 141 : ^C12,0;The destination address of the ->
- net mail message to %1^M;was empty. ->
- ^C14,0;Enter new destination or press ->
- <Enter> to kill message :^M;^C15,1;->
- ^L17;^C14,0;^M
- Description : There was a message entered in the netmail
- area, but Concord could not find the
- destination address, and asks the user for
- it. The %1 will be replaced with the name of
- the person the message is for.
-
- Line 142 : ^C12,0;^M;Private message was addressed ->
- to 'All'. Discarded.^M;
- Description : This line is shown when there was a private
- message addressed to 'All'. When mail is
- addressed to All, it can never be private.
- This is for the offline mail reader part of
- Concord.
-
- Line 143 : ^C12,0;^M;No replies are allowed on ->
- area %1. Discarded.^M:
- Description : Concord will show this message if there is
- a message in the offline mail system for an
- area where replies are not allowed.
-
- Line 144 : *; :
- Description : Character to inform the user if the file is
- tagged. The character before the first
- semicolon is the 'ON' character, the
- character before the second semicolon is the
- 'OFF' character. This character is shown in
- the file lists.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 33
-
- Line 145 : ^C14,0;^E1;^C14,1;Starting to move ->
- files...^M;
- Description : Shown by Concord when the program is moving
- files to a directory at the beginning of the
- move.
-
- Line 146 : ^C15,0;^M;Which packer do you want ->
- to use?^M;
- Description : This line is above the list of archivers
- available, when Concord needs to know which
- archiver to use.
-
- Line 147 : ^C14,0;@PACKER_KEY@^C7; - ^C11;->
- @PACKER_NAME@^M;
- Description : Concord will use this line as many times as
- you have packers defined in the
- configuration part of the program. This line
- is the line that displays the archiver and
- the selection key.
-
- Line 148 : ^C10,0;^M;@PACKER_EXT@ selected.^M
- Description : This is the line that informs the user which
- archiver he/she selected from the list.
-
- Line 149 : ^C15,0;Please enter your choice ->
- (^C14;%1^C15;):
- Description : Line shown by Concord when the user is asked
- to select from a list. The %1 is replaced by
- the default selection key. This is the first
- option defined in the configuration. This
- line is used when selecting a archiver,
- protocol, editor, character set, etc...
-
- Line 150 : ^C15,0;^M;Which transfer protocol do ->
- you want to use?^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord wants to
- know which transfer protocol to use. This is
- the line above the available transfer
- protocols.
-
- Line 151 : ^C14,0;@PROT_KEY@^C7; - ^C11;->
- @PROT_NAME@^M;
- Description : This line is used by Concord to display the
- transfer protocols available. It is used as
- many times as there are protocols defined.
-
- Line 152 : ^C10,0;^M;@PROT_NAME@ selected.^M;
- Description : Line informing the user about the protocol
- he/she selected.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 34
-
- Line 153 : ^C15,0;There is @DISKSPACE@ KB free on ->
- current disk.^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user informing him/her
- about the amount of free diskspace on the
- harddisk. This is shown before an upload is
- done.
-
- Line 154 : ^C15,0;^M;Move file %1 from directory : ->
- ^C15,1;^L40;^C14,0;^M;
- Description : Shown at a local upload when Concord wants
- to know where to move the file from that is
- 'uploaded' to the system. The %1 is replaced
- by Concord with the filename.
-
- Line 155 : ^C10,0;^M;Press <^C14;~1Enter^C10;) to ->
- start transfer, <^C14;~2A^C10;> to ->
- abort, <^C14;~3!^C10;> to log off after ->
- transfer,^M; <^C14;~4P^C10;> to ->
- change transfer protocol.^W;^M;
- Description : Line shown before a transfer is started
- informing the user about the available
- options.
-
- Line 156 : ^C15,0;Start your transfer now or press ->
- <^C14;Ctrl-X^C15;> over a dozen times ->
- to abort.^M;^M;
- Description : Concord shows this line when the transfer is
- started, informing the user that the
- transfer can be aborted by pressing ^X
- several times. After showing this line,
- Concord will call the transfer protocol.
-
- Line 157 : ^C12,0;Transfer aborted. Try again? ->
- (~1Y/~2n)^W;^M;
- Description : Concord shows this line when the transfer
- was aborted, giving the user the option to
- start again.
-
- Line 158 : ^C13,0;Logoff in ^C15;%1^C13; seconds. ->
- Press <^C14;!^C13;> to logoff now or ->
- <^C14;~A^C13;> to abort logoff.^W;^M;^M;
- Description : When the user selected to log off after the
- file transfer, Concord shows this textline
- to the user. The %1 is replaced by the
- number of seconds left before logoff.
-
- Line 159 : ^C15,0;^M;Where to copy files in down->
- load queue :^M;^C15,1;^L67;^C14,0;^M;
- Description : If you are logged on locally, Concord will
- not start a download protocol but instead
- ask you where to move the file(s) in the
- download queue. This line is that question.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 35
-
- Line 160 : ^C14,0;Which name to use? ^C15,1;^l35;
- ^C14,0;^M;
- Description : When a user wants to enter a message and an
- alias can be used, Concord shows this line
- to ask for the alias. Note that this line is
- only used when any alias can be used, not
- just the alias defined in the userbase.
-
- Line 161 : ^C14,0;Use alias? (~1y/^2N)^W;^M;
- Description : When the user wants to enter a message in an
- area where either his/her real name or the
- in the userbase defined alias can be used,
- Concord will show this line to ask the user
- if he/she wants to use an alias.
-
- Line 162 : ^C14,0:Public? (~1Y/~2n)^W;^M;
- Description : Concord will show this line when the user
- wants to enter a new message and the area
- allows the use of private and public
- messages.
-
- Line 163 : ^C12,0;User not found. ^C15,0;Use "?" ->
- or "<searchstring>?" to scan user names ->
- and aliases.^M;
- Description : When the user enters a message in a local
- area and the user does not exist in the
- userbase, Concord will show this line
- informing the user about the fact that the
- addressee does not exist.
-
- | Line 164 : ^C14,0;^]@MAREA_KINDS@<>1;^M;Enter "All" ->
- | if message is to everyone. ^]1;^M;To ->
- (?=List) : ^C15,1;^L35;^C14,0;^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when he/she
- starts entering a new message and Concord
- wants to know who the message is to.
- | Depending on the area type the full line is
- | shown or only the last bit.
-
- Line 165 : ^C14,0;^M;Subj : ^E3;^C15,1;^L72;->
- ^C14,0;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord wants to
- now the subject of the new message.
-
- Line 166 : %1 entered a message addressed to you.
- Description : An user on an other line entered a message
- addressed to you.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 36
-
- Line 167 : This message is a reply to a message ->
- originally posted^M;by @MSG_FROM@ to ->
- @MSG_TO@ on @MSG_DATE@ :^M;^M;
- Description : This line is used in a reply message as the
- header of the new message informing the
- reader where you quoted the text in the
- message from. Please note that quoting
- should be used with care, otherwise mailflow
- will grow considerably and will get to
- expensive.
-
- Line 168 : ^C7,0;^M;[@TAGFILES_COUNT@ files ->
- (@TAGFILES_KB@k, @TAGFILES_TIME@ min) ->
- already waiting in your download queue]->
- ^M;^C15,0;Enter file(s) to download ->
- (Enter to continue) : ^M;^C15,1;^L79;->
- ^C14,0;^M;
- Description : When the user selects the download command
- from the menu this line is shown informing
- the user about the number of files tagged.
- Then the user is given the option to add
- files for the download.
-
- Line 169 : ^C12,0;No files were found to download. ->
- Press ENTER to continue.^A;^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when there are no
- files to download, but the user selected the
- download option and either didn't enter any
- files to download when Concord asked for the
- files (line 168) or entered a file which
- does not exist on the system.
-
- Line 170 : 06;^C15,0;^E1;^M;protocol: @PROT_NAME@->
- ^M;Files to transfer:^M;^C9,0;
- Description : Line shown to inform the user about the
- number of files that are ready to be
- transferred and the name of the protocol to
- be used for the transfer. The actual
- filenames are displayed by line 171.
-
- Line 171 : %1.13
- Description : Concord uses this line to display the
- filenames mentioned in the previous line.
- The %1 is replaced by the filename.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 37
-
- Line 172 : ^C15,0;Total of ^C12,0%1^C15,0; files ->
- consuming ^C12,0;%2^C15,0; bytes of ->
- disk space;^M;Transfer takes about ->
- ^C12,0%3^C15,0; minutes.^M;^M;
- Description : Line informing the user about the amount of
- kilobytes to transfer and the time this will
- take. This line is shown after line 170 and
- 171. The %1 is replaced by the number of
- files, the %2 is the amount of kilobytes and
- %3 is the time that is needed to transfer
- the files.
-
- Line 173 : ^C14,0;^M;Enter msg number to jump to ->
- : ^C14,1;^L6;^C14,0;^X-40;^E3;
- Description : Shown to the user/Sysop when the jump
- message command is pressed while reading
- messages and Concord needs to know to which
- message to jump.
-
- Line 174 : ^C12,0;^M;Are you sure to delete this ->
- message? (~2y/~1N) ^W;^X-40;^E3;
- Description : Shown to the user/Sysop when he/she selects
- the delete command from the options while
- reading messages.
-
- Line 175 : ^C14,0;^M;Search for text : ^C14,1;^L40;->
- ^X-40;^E3;
- Description : When a user presses the message search
- command while reading messages this line is
- displayed asking for the text to search for.
-
- Line 176 : ^C15,0;Searching for next occurrence... ->
- Press Ctrl-Z to abort.^M;
- Description : While Concord is searching for the text
- entered by the user in line 175, this line
- is displayed.
-
- Line 177 : ^C14,0;Press <~1Q> to quit, <~2C> to ->
- change information, <~3R> to remove ->
- from list,^M; <~4V> to verify ->
- existence or <~5A> to show again. ->
- (Q/C/R/V/A)^W;^M;
- Description : Textline shown underneath the extended BBS
- information in the BBS list.
-
- Line 178 : ^C14,0;Are you sure to remove BBS from ->
- list? (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- Description : When the remove option in line 177 is used,
- this line is shown to ask if you are sure to
- remove the BBS from the BBS list.
-
- Line 179 : ^C12,0;BBS removed.^M;
- Description : Concord confirms the fact that the BBS has
- been removed.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 38
-
- Line 180 : ^C12,0;BBS verified.^M;
- Description : Concord confirms that the BBS has been
- verified by the Sysop. (See line 177)
-
- Line 181 : ^C14,0;Which BBS to operate : ^C14,1;->
- ^L40;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : Shown when Concord wants to know which BBS
- you want to add, change, remove etc.
-
- Line 182 : *; ;
- Description : Character to inform the user if the message
- area is part of his/her Combined message
- areas. The character before the first
- semicolon is the 'ON' character, the
- character before the second semicolon is the
- 'OFF' character.
-
- Line 183 : *; ;
- Description : Same as in line 182, except this line is
- used to display combined areas in the file
- selection screen.
-
- Line 184 : *; ;
- Description : Same as in line 182, except this line is
- used to display mail areas to be scanned for
- new mail in the mail area selection screen.
-
- Line 185 : R; ;
- Description : Same as in line 182, except this line is
- used to display of a message is received or
- not in the message selection (quickscan)
- screen.
-
- Line 186 : ^C14,0;Which offline format do you want ->
- to use? (~2Q)WK, (~4B)luewave, (~3O)men,->
- (~1A)SCII?^W;^M;
- Description : Line which Concord uses to ask the user
- which offline format he/she wants to use for
- the mailsystem.
-
- Line 187 : ^C11,1;%2:05^X-05;
- Description : This line is used by Concord to inform the
- user about the progress that is made in
- exporting messages in the offline mail
- system. %1 is replaced by the number of
- messages exported in the current area, %2 is
- replaced by the number of total messages
- exported in all selected areas so far.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 39
-
- Line 188 : ^C12,0;Last read pointer file uploaded. ->
- Are you sure to update pointers? (~2y/->
- ~1N) ^W;^M;
- Description : When Concord receives an upload package for
- the offline mail system and there is a file
- with updated lastread pointers included,
- Concord will ask for a confirmation of the
- user if he/she really wants to update the
- counters.
-
- Line 189 : ^C12,0;Updating last read pointers! ->
- Please stand by, this might take a ->
- while...^M;
- Description : When the user answered positive to the
- previous question (line 188) Concord will
- display this message informing the user
- about the fact that his/her lastread
- pointers are updated.
-
- Line 190 : ^C12,1; Delete file @FILE_NAME_EXT@ ->
- and remove from list? (~2y/~1N) ^E3;->
- ^W;^X-40;
- Description : When you have Sysop level access to a file
- area and you are listing the files, you can
- press the delete key (or any other key you
- defined) and remove a file from the list.
- This line is used by Concord to ask if you
- are sure you want this file to be removed.
- Please note that you need Sysop access to
- the file area to use this option.
-
- Line 191 : ^C15;Please select your language:^M;
- Description : Line shown above the available languages
- when Concord asks the user which language
- he/she wants to use.
-
- Line 192 : ^C14,0;@LNG_KEY@^C11; - @LNG_DESC@^M;
- Description : Concord will use this line to display the
- available languages to the user.
-
- Line 193 : ^C15,0;Please enter your choice (^14;%1->
- ^C15;):
- Description : Line displayed by Concord when the user is
- asked for his/he language. The %! is
- replaced by the default selection key. This
- is the first language defined in the control
- file.
-
- Line 194 : ^C10,0;^M;using '@LNG_DESC@'.^M;
- Description : Textline to inform the user which language
- file Concord is going to use.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 40
-
- Line 195 : ^C15,0;Which charset do you want to use?->
- ^M;
- Description : When the user has the choice between the
- different charactersets available in
- Concord, the BBS program will use this line
- to ask the user about the characterset to
- use.
-
- Line 196 : ^C14,0;@CHARSET_KEY@^C7; - ^C11;->
- @CHARSET_NAME@^M;
- Description : This line is used by Concord to display the
- available charactersets.
-
- Line 197 : ^C10,0;^M;@CHARSET_NAME@ selected.^M;
- Description : Textline to inform the user about the chosen
- characterset.
-
- Line 198 : ^C15,0;^M;Enter your comment to next ->
- user (Max. 5 lines) :^M;^C14,0;->
- <-------//--->^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when he/she can enter
- a comment to the next user. The line of
- minus characters is 77 characters long and
- displayed above the line where the user can
- enter the comment, informing the user about
- the line length.
-
- Line 199 : ^C15,1;^L79;^C15,0;^M;
- Description : This is the line used by Concord to display
- the area where the user can enter the
- comment for the next user.
-
- Line 200 : ^M;^C13,0;Save comment? (~1Y/~2n) ->
- ^W;^M;^M;
- Description : Textline used by Concord to ask the user if
- he/she wants to save the comment.
-
- Line 201 : ^M;^C12,0;Logout comment^M;^M;^C12,0;->
- Date : ^C14,0;@CURRDATE@ @CURRTIME@^M;->
- ^C12,0;From : ^C14,0;@NAME@ ^C12,0;->
- from ^C14,0;@CITY@^M;^C12,0;To : ->
- ^C14,0;Next user^M;^M;^C11,0;
- Description : Textline with information about who wrote
- the comment to next user when a comment is
- shown to the next user.
-
- Line 202 : ^M:^C15,0;Press ^C7,0;[^C14,0;ENTER->
- ^C7,0;] ^C15,0;to continue.^A;^M;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord after showing the
- comment to next user.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 41
-
- Line 203 : ^M;^M;^C12,0;N O D E S H U T D O W N ->
- ! Please call back later...^M;^M;
- Description : When a node line is (going) down this
- textline is shown to the user informing
- him/her about that fact.
-
- Line 204 : ^C10,0;Checking for new bulletins...^M;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord when it is
- scanning for new bulletins.
-
- Line 205 : ^C10,0;No bulletins found.^M;^M;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord informing the user
- about the fact that there are no new
- bulletins.
-
- Line 206 : ^C10,0;Select bulletin to view (~AQ=->
- Quit, %1) [Q] : ^W;^M;^M;
- Description : Textline informing the user about the new
- bulletins available. The %1 is replaced by
- the number of the new bulletin(s).
-
- Line 207 : ^C10,0;^E1;List of bulletins :^M;
- Description : Textline telling the user that the following
- bulletins are new.
-
- Line 208 : ^C14,0;%1 ^C7,0;- ^C13,0;%2 ^C7,0;- ->
- ^C15,0;%4^M;
- Description : Concord uses this line to display the
- bulletins to the user. The %1 is replaced by
- the bulletin number. The %2 is the Bulletin
- name and %4 is the description.
-
- Line 209 : ^C15,0;^X-79;Enter string to search: ->
- ^E3;^C14,1^L40;^C15,0;^X-79;^E3;^CN,N;
- Description :
-
- Line 210 : ^C14,0:Sysop shelled to DOS!^M;
- Description : This line is used when the Sysop shelled to
- DOS level when a user is online. (Alt-J key)
-
- Line 211 : ^C14,0;Sysop came back...^M;
- Description : Shown when the Sysop returns from the MS-Dos
- operating shell.
-
- Line 212 : Online message to node #%1
- Description : Used by Concord when there is a message for
- one of the other lines. The %1 is replaced
- by Concord by the node number.
-
- Line 213 : ^C14,0;Processing file request "^C15,0;->
- %1^C14,0;"...^M;
- Description : When Concord is processing a file request
- received through the offline mail system,
- Concord shows this line.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 42
-
- Line 214 : ^C14,0;Setting message areas... Hold on->
- ...^M;
- Description : Shown by Concord when the program is
- changing the settings for the user
- concerning the message areas.
-
- Line 215 : ^C15,0;Message saved : ^M;^C13,0;To: ->
- ^C11,0;@MSG_PRIV@:01 ^C14,0;@MSG_TO@->
- ^M;^C13,0;Subj: ^C14,0;@MSG_SUBJ@^M;->
- ^C13,0;Area: ^C14,0;@MAREA_NAME@^M;
- Description : This information is shown to the user after
- he/she wrote a message or replied to another
- message and saved this message. Concord
- displays the information, so the user knows
- the message is saved.
-
- Line 216 : ^C7,0;This is kinda weird time to call ->
- for the Sysop. You may have better ->
- chances to reach him^M;during the day ->
- light...^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when the Sysop is paged
- outside paging hours.
-
- Line 217 : ^C7,0;Sysop may not be currently ->
- available. Please try later again...^M;
- Description : Textline used by Concord to inform the user
- the Sysop is not available for a chat.
-
- Line 218 : ^C7,0;You have already paged Sysop. ->
- Just relax and have a seat, or perhaps ->
- you can^M;come back later...^M;
- Description : Shown to the user when he/she exceeded the
- total number of pages to the Sysop but still
- tried again.
-
- Line 219 : ^C14,0;Please sent your reply message ->
- packet (.REP. .NEW, OMEN...) now...^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord is ready
- to receive the new messages and replies in
- the offline mail system.
-
- Line 220 : ^C14,0;Area # Description ->
- Total msgs Msgs to you ->
- Msgs packed^M;^C7,0---------//---^M;
- Description : Textline shown as a header when Concord is
- packing the messages in the offline mail
- system. The line is the full length of the
- screen.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 43
-
- Line 221 : ^C15,0;^X-79;@MAREA_NUM@:06 @MAREA_NAME@->
- .33 @MAREA_MAX@:10 %1:10 %2:10^E3;^M;
- Description : This line is used by Concord when packing
- the messages in the offline mail system. it
- informs the user about the number of
- messages in the area, the number of messages
- to the user and the number of messages
- packed. This line is used for every area
- that is defined for the offline mail system.
-
- Line 222 : ^C7,0;-------//-----^M;^C14,0; ->
- Total %1:10->
- %2:10 %3:10^M;^M;
- Description : Starting with a line, this textline is the
- end of the list where Concord is packing the
- offline messages. It shows the line and then
- the totals for this session. The line is
- shown shortened for easy reading.
-
- Line 223 : ^C15,0;Hold on, packing messages...^M;
- Description : Textline shown when Concord is shelling to
- the archive program to pack the messages
- selected in the offline mail system.
-
- Line 224 : ^C15,0;No messages found to pack.^M;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord when there are no
- messages to pack in the offline mail system.
-
- Line 225 : ^C14,0;Hold on, exporting BBS list... ->
- (Press Ctrl-C to abort.)^M;
- Description : Line shown to the user when Concord is
- preparing the internal BBS list for download
- to the user.
-
- Line 226 : ^C14,0;Examining BBS list...^M;
- Description : Shown when Concord is searching the BBS list
- for a BBS.
-
- Line 227 : ^C12,0;BBS not found!^M;
- Description : Shown when Concord can't find the specified
- BBS.
-
- Line 228 : ^C12,0;Duplicate BBS name found - you ->
- have to give another BBS name.^M;New ->
- name: ^C14,1;^L35;^C15,0;^M;^M;
- Description : When the user enters a BBS name in the BBS
- list and this name already exists, Concord
- will ask for a new name.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 44
-
- Line 229 : ^C13,0;BBS named "@BBSLIST_NAME@" has ->
- not been verified since @BBSLIST_->
- VERIFIED@^M;If this BBS is still ->
- operating, please (V)erify it to keep ->
- it in BBS list.^M;^C15,0;Press ENTER ->
- to see BBS information.^A;^M;
- Description : Concord has the option to erase BBSses from
- the BBS list when they are not verified for
- a certain amount of time. When a Sysop calls
- and his/her BBS has not been verified for
- the amount of time defined in the
- configuration of the program, he/she will
- she the above question.
-
- Line 230 : 04;^C13,1; Set combined areas : ^E3;^L40;
- Description : When a user selects the combined area change
- key in the mail area list, Concord will
- display this question. The 04 tells Concord
- where to place the cursor in the area list
- screen. 01, 02 are the two topmost lines,
- 03, 04 are the two bottom lines.
-
- Line 231 : 04;^C13,1; Set combined areas : ^E3;^L40;
- Description : When a user selects the combined area change
- key in the file area list, Concord will
- display this question.
-
- Line 232 : ^C14,0;Setting areas, hold on...^M;
- Description : When Concord is changing the combined area
- settings, this line is shown to the user.
-
- Line 233 : ^C12,0;Max number of messages in one ->
- packet exceeded. No more added to this ->
- packet...^M;
- Description : This line informs the user that the maximum
- number of messages allowed in one offline
- mail packet has been reached. Concord will
- stop searching for more mail and start
- packing the messages. The rest of the
- messages can be packed when the download
- option is selected again.
-
- Line 234 : ^C12,0;Out of disk space. No more ->
- messages added to this packet...^M;
- Description : When Concord is exporting messages and runs
- out of diskspace, this message is shown.
- After this, Concord will start packing
- messages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 45
-
- Line 235 : ^M;New files list from %1 to %2 ->
- (%3 days).
- Description : In the offline mail packets is also a
- newfiles list. At the top of this list, this
- textline is shown. The %1 is the date the
- user used the offline mail system for the
- last time. The %2 is the date the mail
- packet was created and the %3 is the number
- of days between them. Don't use colour codes
- in this line, since this one is shown to the
- user in the offline mail reader and is
- standard ASCII.
-
- Line 236 : ^C14,0;Exporting new files list... ->
- (Press Ctrl-C to abort.)^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when Concord is
- generating the new files list for the
- offline mail packet.
-
- Line 237 : ^C15,0;Area: @FAREA_NAME@ ... ^E3;^C14,0;
- Description : Line shown to the user to inform him/her of
- the area Concord is currently scanning for
- the new files list in the offline mail
- packet.
-
- Line 238 : @FILE_NAME_EXT@@FILE_SIZE_KB@:04 ->
- @FILE_DATE_SMALL@ [@FILE_DLCOUNT@:03]
- Description : This is the line as it is used by Concord to
- display the new files in the newfiles list
- in the offline mail reader. Do not use
- colour codes in this line, since it is
- normal ASCII.
-
- Line 239 : ^C7,0;[Scanning...]^X-15;
- Description : Shown to the user when Concord is scanning
- for new messages at a mail scan.
-
- Line 240 : ^C7,0;{WAIT}^X-10;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when Concord is
- busy doing something and the user has to
- wait for a moment.
-
- Line 241 : ^C7,0;Press Enter to continue.^M;^A;
- Description : Line used by Concord when the user has to
- press Enter.
-
- Line 242 : ^M; Detecting terminal emulation...
- Description : Textline shown when Concord is detecting the
- type of terminal emulation the user is
- using. This line is used just after a
- connection has been established.
-
- Line 243 : ^C14,0;^E1;Tagged files list :^M;^M;
- Description : Header for the tagged file list.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 46
-
- Line 244 : 05,03; ^C15,0%1:03. ^C13,0;%2:12 ->
- ^C11,0;%3:04^C10,0;k
- Description : This line is used by Concord to build the
- tagged file list. The %1 is replaced by the
- number of the file. the %2 is the file name
- and %3 is the amount in Kbytes. The 05 tells
- Concord how many lines the header plus more
- prompt takes, the (first) 03 tells Concord
- how many columns there are in the tagged
- file list.
-
- Line 245 : ^M;^C14,0;Total of ^C15,0;@TAGFILES_->
- COUNT@ ^C14,0;files (^C15,0@TAGFILES_->
- KB@^C14,0;k, ^C15,0;@TIME_LEFT@ ^C14,0;->
- min.^M;^M;
- Description : Showing the totals of the tagline, Concord
- shows this line to the user when he/she
- selected to edit the tagfiles list.
-
- Line 246 : ^C7,0;(^C14,0;~2R^C7,0;)^C15,0;emove ->
- file(s) from the download queue, ^C7,0;->
- (^C14,0;~1Q^C7,0;)^C15,0;uit? ^W;^M;^M;
- Description : Informing the user about the options in the
- tagged files edit list, this line is shown
- by Concord.
-
- Line 247 : ^C14,0;Which files to remove from ->
- download queue? Give name(s) or ->
- number(s)...^M;^C14,1;^L79;^C14,0;^M;^M;
- Description : When the user selects to remove a file from
- the tagged file list, Concord will show this
- line to ask which file to remove.
-
- Line 248 : ^C12,0;Duplicate file @FILE_NAME_EXT@ ->
- found! Press Enter.^A;^M;
- Description : Textline shown to an uploader when the file
- he/she wants to upload is already available
- on the BBS.
-
- Line 249 : ^C15,0;^M;Checking uploaded file %1 ->
- ...^M;
- Description : Textline shown by Concord when the program
- is checking the uploaded file. The %1 is
- replaced by the filename.
-
- Line 250 : ^C12,0;VIRUS found from uploaded file!^M;
- Description : The anti virus program returned a wrong
- errorlevel to Concord and Concord informs
- the user that a virus has been found. This
- is not always the case, you might have set
- the settings for the virusscanner wrong, so
- please check this carefully when you see
- this with every uploaded file.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 47
-
- Line 251 : ^C15,0;Tossing message packet to message->
- base...^M;
- Description : When Concord is tossing the mail received in
- the uploaded reply packet for the offline
- mail reader to the message base, Concord
- will show this textline.
-
- Line 252 : ^C12,0;Duplicate message found from ->
- message packet. Deleted. Press Enter.->
- ^A;^M;
- Description : When there is a duplicate message found in
- the reply packet for the offline mail
- system, this textline is shown and the
- message is deleted.
-
- Line 253 : List of users in chat channel %2 :^M; ->
- # Nick Name ->
- City
- Description : header for the list with users in the
- multinode chat. 'Nick' is the name the user
- is using in the multinode chat.
-
- Line 254 : @WHO_NUM@:03 %1.15 @WHO_NAME@.35 ->
- @WHO_CITY@
- Description : The line that Concord will use to display
- the names of the people in the multinode
- chat. The %1 is replaced by the nick name
- the user is using.
-
- Line 255 : * List of chat channels :^M; # Name ->
- Users Topic
- Description : A listheader for the available chatchannels
- that are available.
-
- Line 256 : %1:03 %2.30 %3:05 %4.35
- Description : This line is used by Concord to display the
- information about the chatchannels. The %1
- is the number, %2 the name, %3 the number of
- users and %4 the topic.
-
- Line 257 : 007,007,013,007,007,031
- Description : These are the colours used in the multinode
- chat. Here's a list:
-
- 1st Text colour in the multinode chat.
- Default 007.
-
- 2nd The colour for the lists in the
- multinode chat. Default 007.
-
- 3rd Colour for private messages. Default is
- 013.
- >> Continue >>
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 48
-
- 4th Colour for /ME messages. Default is
- 007.
-
- 5th Colour for information strings in the
- multinode chat. Default is 007.
-
- 6th This is the edit colour in the
- multinode chat.
-
- You can change these colours as you like.
-
- Line 258 : No users in this channel
- Description : Show to the user when there are no users in
- the multinode chatchannel.
-
- Line 259 : General area
- Description : Default name of the first chatchannel. This
- one is defined by the Sysop, other
- chatchannels can be defined by the users.
-
- Line 260 : 01;^C15,0;^E1;Welcome to Concord multi ->
- node chat system.^M;
- Description : Textline that welcomes users into the
- multinode chat.
-
- Line 261 : %1 (@NAME@ from @CITY@) joins the ->
- channel...
- Description : Informing the other users in the chat that
- a new user is online in the chatchannel. The
- %1 is replaced by the nickname the user is
- using in the chatchannel.
-
- Line 262 : %1 (@NAME@) is now known as %2
- Description : When a user changes his/her nickname, this
- line is used to inform the other chatchannel
- users about the name change.
-
- Line 263 : Changing current chatchannel to %2 ->
- (%3 users), title: "%4".
- Description : When changing a chatchannel, Concord informs
- the user with this line. The %2 is the
- chatchannel number, %3 the number of users
- in the channel and %4 the name of the
- channel.
-
- Line 264 : Changing current chat channel title to %4.
- Description : Line informing users in the chat channel
- that the name has changed. %4 is the new
- name.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 49
-
- Line 265 : %1 (@NAME@ from @CITY@) leaves the ->
- channel...
- Description : Informing the other users in the chat that
- an user is offline in the chatchannel. The
- %1 is replaced by the nickname the user is
- using in the chatchannel.
-
- Line 266 : ^C15,0;Message marked...^P;^M;
- Description : Shown when a message is marked in the
- messages list screen.
-
- Line 267 : *; ;
- Description : Character to inform the user if the mail
- area is marked as being used in the offline
- mail packet. If the mark is on, Concord will
- download messages from this area into the
- offline mail packet. The character before
- the first semicolon is the 'ON' character,
- the character before the second semicolon is
- the 'OFF' character.
-
- Line 268 : ^STRASHCAN.ANS;
- Description : Shown to the user when his/her name is found
- in the trashcan of the BBS. This trashcan is
- an ASCII file with names. When the name used
- to log in to the BBS is in this list, line
- 268 is displayed. In this case, because of
- the ^S<filename>; code, it means that the
- ANSI file TRASCHCAN.ANS is displayed. This
- file should be in your textfile directory.
-
- Line 269 : ^C12,0;Sorry, file ^C15,0;%1 ^C12,0;is ->
- not accepted due to system policy.^M;
- Description : When a upload is refused because of system
- policy, this line is displayed. You can
- define unwanted files in the control files
- from Concord. %1 is replaced by the
- filename.
-
- Line 270 : ^C15,0;File %1 requires password.^M;
- Description : Line to inform the user that the selected
- file can not be downloaded without the
- proper password. The %1 is replaced by the
- filename.
-
- Line 271 : ^C14,0;QWK setup: Adding msg area ->
- @MAREA_NAME@ to user combined boards.^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when he/she used
- the ADD option in QWK.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 50
-
- Line 272 : ^C14,0;QWK setup: Adding msg area ->
- @MAREA_NAME@ to user combined boards ->
- and^M;setting last read pointers to ->
- #@LASTREADPTR@ or @MAREA_MAX@ msgs.^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when he/she used
- the ADD option in QWK. Concord informs the
- user also about the adjustment of the last
- read pointer.
-
- Line 273 : ^C14,0;QWK setup: Dropping msg area ->
- @MAREA_NAME@ from user combined boards.^M;
- Description : Textline shown to the user when he/she used
- the DROP option in QWK.
-
- Line 274 : ^C15,0;An aphorism for today :^M;^C14,0;
- Description : Textline shown just before an aphorism is
- shown.
-
- Line 275 : ^C15,0;^M;Press ENTER to continue.^A;^M;
- Description : Textline to inform the user that ENTER needs
- to be pressed. This line is used after
- showing the aphorism.
-
- Line 276 : ^C13,0;Forwarding message....^M;
- Description : Line shown when Concord is forwarding a
- message.
-
- Line 277 : * Originally by @MSG_FROM@^M;->
- * Originally to @MSG_TO@^M;->
- * Originally dated on @MSG_DATE@^M;^M;
- Description : Header of the message that is being
- forwarded, so people can see that it has
- been forwarded.
-
- Line 278 : ^C13,0;Editing message....^M;
- Description : Textline shown when the user selects the
- Edit message option in the mail reading
- menu.
-
- Line 279 : ^C14,0;Do you want to change message ->
- from @MAREA_NAME@? (~1Y/~@n) ^W;^M;
- Description : Line used when Concord asks the user who
- selected to edit a message if he/she wants
- to change the area.
-
- Line 280 : ^C14,0;Do you want to edit message text ->
- (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- Description : Textline used when Concord asks the user if
- he/she wants to edit the text in the
- message, when selecting the edit text menu
- option.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 51
-
- | Line 281 : ^C14,0;^E1;Thanks for using Concord ->
- | multinode chat.^M;
- | Description : Shown to the user when he/she leaves the
- | multi node chat.
- |
- | Line 282 : ^C14,0;/HELP = Help screen /QUIT = Exit ->
- | chat /JOIN = Join channel^M;
- | Description : Information line at the bottom of the chat
- | screen, telling the user which commands are
- | available.
- |
- | Line 283 : ^C7.0;<~1C>ontinue or <~2R>eply to ->
- | message? ^W;^M;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to ask the user if
- | he/she wants to reply to the message that
- | has been send to the user.
- |
- | Line 284 : ^C14,0;Detected terminal emulation ->
- | @EMULATION2@ differs from your old ->
- | settings. Keep it? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Line used when Concord is allowed to detect
- | the terminal emulation when a user is login
- | in and this terminal emulation is not the
- | same as the one stated in the users record
- | in the userbase.
- |
- | Line 285 : ^C14,0;Copying flagged files to temp ->
- | directory. Please hold on...^M;
- | Description : Used by Concord when copying flagged files
- | to the temporary directory.
- |
- | Line 286 : ^C14,0;^E1; # Group Name ->
- | CP Total msgs New Personal^M;
- | Description : When showing the message area statistics,
- | this line is used as the header.
- |
- | Line 287 : ^C7,0;@MAREA_NUM@:04 ^C9,0;@MAREA_->
- | GROUP@.03 ^C15,0;@MAREA_NAME@.25 ->
- | ^C10,0;@MAREA_COMB@:01@MAREA_PKT@:01 ->
- | ^C11,0;@MAREA_MAX@:10 ^C12,0;@MAREA_->
- | NEW@:07 ^C13,0;@MAREA_PERS@:08^M;
- | Description : Macro command line used to display the
- | message area statistics. See chapter 5 for
- | an explanation of all codes.
- |
- | Line 288 : ^C14,0;Total of %1 new messages (of which ->
- | %2 personal messages).^M;Press Enter to ->
- | continue.^A;^M;
- | Description : Bottom line of the message area statistics
- | with the totals of the information and the
- | number of personal messages.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 52
-
- | Line 289 : available
- | Description : Displayed when Concord needs to display
- | 'Available'.
- |
- | Line 290 : not available
- | Description : Displayed when Concord needs to display 'Not
- | available'.
- |
- | Line 291 : ^C15,0;Message unmarked...^P;^M;
- | Description : When Concord has to unmark a message, this
- | line is displayed.
- |
- | Line 292 : 015;^C15,1; %1
- | Description : This is the fullscreenchat Sysop line, where
- | the name of the Sysop (or Co-Sysop) is
- | displayed, %1 is replaced by the name.
- |
- | Line 293 : 014;^C15,1; @NAME@.35 Time:->
- | Mins:
- | Description : This is the userline in the fullscreenchat.
- | It states the username and the time left
- | online.
- |
- | Line 294 : 60,2,31;72,2,31;018,002,025,023,026,007,001
- | Description : These are the keys available in the
- | fullscreenchat window. Here is an
- | explanation of the different numbers:
- |
- | - 1st field (60)
- |
- | Horizontal position of the chat clock.
- |
- | - 2nd field (2)
- |
- | Vertical position of the chat clock.
- |
- | - 3rd field (31)
- |
- | Colour of the chatclock. In this case
- | it is white on blue.
- |
- | - 4th field (72)
- |
- | Horizontal position of the minutes
- | chatted timer.
- |
- | - 5th field (2)
- |
- | Vertical position of the minutes
- | chatted timer.
- |
- | - 6th field (31)
- |
- | Colour of the minutes chatted timer.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 53
-
- | - 7th field (018)
- |
- | Code for the key that redraws the
- | screen. By default this is Ctrl-R.
- |
- | - 8th field (002)
- |
- | Code for the key that is the backscroll
- | key. By default this is the Ctrl-B key.
- |
- | - 9th field (025)
- |
- | Code for the key that is the delete
- | line key. By default this is the Ctrl-Y
- | key.
- |
- | - 10th key (023)
- |
- | Code for the key that is the clear
- | window key. By default this is the
- | Ctrl-W key.
- |
- | - 11th key (026)
- |
- | Code for the key that is the end chat
- | key. By default this is the Ctrl-Z key.
- |
- | - 12th key (007)
- |
- | Code for the key that is the Beep key.
- | It generates a beep tone. By default
- | this is the Ctrl-G key.
- |
- | - 13th key (001)
- |
- | Code for the key that allows the Sysop
- | to show a file to the user. This key
- | only works on the Sysop side. By
- | default this is the Ctrl-A key.
- |
- | See the appendixes for a list of all
- | available keyboard codes.
- |
- | Line 295 : ^E1;^C14,0;Type /HELP in the beginning of ->
- | the line to get editor help.^M;^C13,0;# ->
- | (------------------------------------------>
- | --------------------------------)^M;
- | Description : Top line of the internal editor for Concord.
- |
- | Line 296 : %1:04 %2^E3;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to display the textline
- | in the internal editor.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 54
-
- | Line 297 : ^X-5;^C14,0;~2A^C15;bort ->
- | ^C14;~1C^C15;ontinue ^C14;~3D^C15;isplay ->
- | ^C14;~4E^C15;dit ^C14;~5H^C15;elp ^C14;->
- | ~6I^C15;nsert ^C14;~7K^C15;ill ->
- | ^C14;~8M^C15;ove ^C14;~9Q^C15;uote ->
- | ^C14;~AR^C15;edraw ^C14;~BS^C15;ave ->
- | ^C7;[^C14;C^C7;] : ^W;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed in the internal editor when
- | the / key is pressed at the beginning of the
- | line.
- |
- | Line 298 : ^C11,0;Do you want to abort this message? ->
- | (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | abort command is used.
- |
- | Line 299 : ^C11,0;Edit line number : ->
- | ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | edit command is used.
- |
- | Line 300 : ^C11,0;Where to insert line (Empty = End ->
- | of message) : ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | insert command is used.
- |
- | Line 301 : ^C11,0;Which line(s) to kill? (Empty = ->
- | Nothing)^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | kill command is used.
- |
- | Line 302 : ^C11,0;Which line(s) to move? (Empty = ->
- | Nothing)^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | move command is used.
- |
- | Line 303 : ^C11,0;Which line(s) to quote? (Empty = ->
- | Nothing, /? = View original text)^M;
- | Description : Displayed in the internal editor when the
- | quote command is used.
- |
- | Line 304 : ^C11,0;From line : ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Used in the internal editor when Concord
- | needs to now from which line to start with
- | the specified action.
- |
- | Line 305 : ^C11,0;To line : ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Used in the internal editor when Concord
- | needs to know until what line to perform the
- | requested action.
- |
- | Line 306 : ^C11,0;Save message? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Used in the internal editor when the save
- | option is used.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 55
-
- | Line 307 : ^C11,0;Where to move lines (Empty = End ->
- | of message) : ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Used in the internal editor when Concord
- | needs to know where to move the line(s).
- |
- | Line 308 : ^C11,0;Display text from line : ->
- | ^C14,1;^L4;^C11,0;^M;
- | Description : Displayed when Concord needs to know which
- | lines to display in the internal editor.
- |
- | Line 309 : 07,219,220;^C14,0;^E1;^C14,1; Concord ->
- | BBS system users age statistics ->
- | histogram^E3;^C14,0;^M;^M;Listing %1 ->
- | users with an average age of %4.04 ->
- | years.^M;^C15,0;%3^M;^C7,0;
- | Description : Line used by Concord in the age statistics
- | diagram as a header.
- |
- | Line 310 : ^C7,0; ^C13,0;%1^M;
- | Description : Line used to display the ages.
- |
- | Line 311 : ^C7,0;Extended ASCII displayed here^M; ->
- | ^C14,0;Age -> - 07 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 ->
- | 31 34 37 40 43 46 49 52 55 58 61 64 67 ->
- | 70+^M;^C15,0;Press ENTER to continue.^A;^M;
- | Description : Line used in the age statistics diagram as
- | the age lines and the bottom line. (Extended
- | ASCII has been removed from this line.)
- |
- | Line 312 : ^C12,0;Do you want to pack messages ->
- | prepared so far? (~2Y/~1n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : When the scanning for offline mail is
- | aborted, Concord will ask if the already
- | prepared mail can be packed into an archive.
- |
- | Line 313 : %1 Offline message packet (%2 messages)^M;
- | Description : Used in the offline mail packet generation.
- |
- | Line 314 : ^C15,0;Enter filename(s) to erase in ->
- | local file attach path : ->
- | ^C14,1;^L12;^C15,0;^M;
- | Description : Shown by Concord when the program needs to
- | know which file(s) to erase from the local
- | attach path.
- |
- | Line 315 : ^C15,0;Erase ALL files attached to you? ->
- | (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Used by Concord when the program needs to
- | know if all local attach files to you need
- | to be erased.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 56
-
- | Line 316 : ^C14,0;Attach file(s) to whom (?=List) : ->
- | ^C15,1;^L35;^C14,0;^M;
- | Description : Shown when Concord asks for whom the local
- | attach file is.
- |
- | Line 317 : ^C14,0;Hold on, packing new files list...^M;
- | Description : Line used when Concord is packing the new
- | files list.
- |
- | Line 318 : 01,Y,Y,Y;^C14,0;@VOTE_NUM@:05@VOTE_NEW@ ->
- | @VOTE_QUESTION@.53 @VOTE_DATE@.08 @VOTE_->
- | USERSTATUS@.09^E3;^M;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to display the vote
- | questions. This is the default line.
- |
- | Line 319 : 01,79,014,112;@VOTE_NUM@:05@VOTE_NEW@ ->
- | @VOTE_QUESTION@.53 @VOTE_DATE@.08 @VOTE_->
- | USERSTATUS@.09^E3;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to display the inverse
- | bar in the vote selection screen. This line
- | is used in combination with line 317.
- |
- | Line 320 : 013,032,081,063
- | Description : These are the key codes generated by the
- | keyboard for the various functions in the
- | vote selection screen. If you want to use
- | different keys for the options, this is
- | where you change them. A list of scan codes
- | can be found in your printer or MS-Dos
- | manual. Appendix B lists the scan codes for
- | the keys that are normally not listed in
- | your printer or MS-Dos manual. The keys are
- | listed in the order they are in, the default
- | is entered in brackets:
- |
- | - 1st field (013)
- |
- | This field selects the question. By
- | default it is the RETURN key. Key code
- | 013.
- |
- | - 2nd field (032)
- |
- | This field executes the question for
- | searching for a string. By default this
- | is the SPACE. Key code 032.
- |
- | - 3rd field (081)
- |
- | This field quits the area selection and
- | returns you to the area you were in
- | when you selected the vote selection
- | option. By default the Q key. Key code
- | 081.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 57
-
- | - 4th field (063)
- |
- | This field brings up the help screen.
- | By default this is the ? key. Key code
- | 063.
- |
- |
- | Line 321 : 04;^C13,1; Enter search string : ^E3;^L20;
- | Description : Question that is shown when you use the
- | string search option in the vote selection
- | screen.
- |
- | Line 322 : 04;^C13,1; Enter record number : ^E3;^L5;
- | Description : Question that is shown when you want to
- | select a vote by entering the number.
- |
- | Line 323 : ^G1,1;^C15,1; NUM VOTE QUESTION ->
- | DATE ->
- | YOUR VOTE^E3;^C15,0;^M;^E3;^M;
- | Description : Top line of the screen where the votes are
- | displayed.
- |
- | Line 324 : ^C15,0;^E3;^M;^C15,1; Press ENTER or ->
- | number to vote, SPACE to find question or ->
- | Q to cancel.^E3;
- | Description : Bottom line of the screen where the votes
- | are displayed.
- |
- | Line 325 : *; ;
- | Description : The first character is the character to
- | display that the vote is new, the second is
- | the character displayed if the vote is old.
- | The ; characters are not counted.
- |
- | Line 326 : Voted
- | Description : Displayed when you voted on this question.
- |
- | Line 327 : Not voted
- | Description : Displayed when you did not vote on this
- | question.
- |
- | Line 328 : Private
- | Description : This is displayed when the macro @MSG_PRIV@
- | is shown in Concord and the message is
- | private. Otherwise Line 329 is displayed.
- |
- | Line 329 : Public
- | Description : See line 328.
- |
- | Line 330 : ^C14,0;Listing local attach files :^M;
- | Description : Displayed at the top of the list of the
- | local attach files.
- |
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 58
-
- | Line 331 : ^C15,0;^E1;^C15,1; Concord Vote System / ->
- | Add Question^E3;^C14,0;^M;^M; Enter ->
- | question %1 :^M;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed at the top where you can
- | enter a new vote question.
- |
- | Line 332 : ^C14,1; ^L78;^C14,0;^M;
- | Description : Line used to enter the new vote question.
- |
- | Line 333 : ^C14,0;^M; Now give the possible vote ->
- | selections (empty line to end) :^M;^M;
- | Description : Used when Concord needs to know the answers
- | to the vote question.
- |
- | Line 334 : ^C11,0; %1) ^C14,1;^L60;^C14,0;^M;
- | Description : Line used to enter the vote answers for the
- | vote question.
- |
- | Line 335 : ^C14,0;^M; Do you want to allow users to ->
- | share points to these selections? (~1y/->
- | ~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Shown when Concord needs to know if there is
- | more then one answer possible to the vote
- | question.
- |
- | Line 336 : ^C14,0; ... How many points? (1-100) ->
- | ^C14,1;^L3;^C14,0;^M;
- | Description : Displayed when Concord needs to know how
- | many points can be given in total to all
- | answers of the vote question.
- |
- | Line 337 : ^C14,0; ... To how many selections can ->
- | user share points? (Empty = All) ->
- | ^C14,1;^L2;^C14,0;^M;
- | Description : Question so Concord will know to how many
- | answers the user can give points.
- |
- | Line 338 : ^C14,0; Can user add more selections? ->
- | (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Question of the user can add more answers or
- | not to a vote question.
- |
- | Line 339 : ^C14,0; Can user change his vote later? ->
- | (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Question if the user can change his/her vote
- | later.
- |
- | Line 340 : ^C14,0; Can user look at vote results ->
- | before voting? (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Question if the user can have a look at the
- | results on the answers before voting
- | him/herself.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 59
-
- | Line 341 : ^C14,0; Do you want to save this vote ->
- | question? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Does the vote question needs to be saved or
- | not.
- |
- | Line 342 : ^C15,0; Saved.^M;
- | Description : Confirmation that the question is saved.
- |
- | Line 343 : ^C15,0; Not saved.^M;
- | Description : Confirmation that the question was not
- | saved.
- |
- | Line 344 : ^C12,0; Are you sure to abort? (~1y/~2N) ->
- | ^W;^M;
- | Description : Question from Concord if you are sure to
- | abort the vote question.
- |
- | Line 345 : ^C15,0;^E1;^C15,1; Concord Vote ->
- | System^E3;^C14,0;^M;^M;
- | Description : Line shown at the top of the screen where
- | the user can vote on the question selected.
- |
- | Line 346 : ^C14,0; Question @VOTE_NUM@ by ->
- | @VOTE_ADDEDBY@ on @VOTE_DATE@ :^M;^M;->
- | ^C13,0; @VOTE_QUESTION@^M;^M;^C15,0; ->
- | @VOTE_USERS@ users voted so far.^M;^M;
- | Description : Information about the vote question.
- |
- | Line 347 : ^C14,0; Possible votes are :^M;
- | Description : Line used above the possible answers to the
- | vote question.
- |
- | Line 348 : ^C11,0; %1) ^C12,0;%2.60 %3^M;
- | Description : Line used to display the answers to the vote
- | question.
- |
- | Line 349 : ^C14,0;^M; Your vote : %1^M;^M;
- | Description : Line used when you vote.
- |
- | Line 350 : ^C14,0;^M; You have %1 points left.^M;^M;
- | Description : Line used when voting to display the number
- | of points left to give away.
- |
- | Line 351 : R;D;A;Q;?;^C15,0; Select vote by entering ->
- | the selection number.^M; Enter (R) to see ->
- | results before voting, (D) to delete this ->
- | question,^M; (A) to add new ->
- | selection or (Q) to go back to questions :->
- | ^C14,1;^L2;^C14,0;^M;^M;
- | Description : Possible answers which can be given to the
- | vote question.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 60
-
- | Line 352 : %1:02 points.
- | Description : Used when voting with points to display the
- | number of points given.
- |
- | Line 353 : Selected.
- | Description : Line used in the voting to display the
- | answer you voted for.
- |
- | Line 354 : ^C12,0; Are you sure to delete this ->
- | question? (~1y/~2N) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Question displayed before a vote question is
- | deleted.
- |
- | Line 355 : ^C15,0; Returning back to vote questions. ->
- | Do you wish to see vote results? (~1Y/~2n)->
- | ^W;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed when the user selected to
- | return to the vote selection menu.
- |
- | Line 356 : ^C15,0; How many points do you want to ->
- | give for number %1 (%3 points left) ? ->
- | ^C14,1;^L3;^C15,0;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed when voting with points.
- |
- | Line 357 : ^C15,0; %1 points given. You have %2 ->
- | points left.^M;
- | Description : Used after you gave points to an answer.
- |
- | Line 358 : ^C15,0; Number %1 (%2) selected.^M;
- | Description : Used when you made a selection from the
- | possible answers.
- |
- | Line 359 : ^C15,0;^E1;^C15,1; Concord Vote System ->
- | / Results^E3;^C14,0;^M;^M;
- | Description : Line used as a header above the voting
- | results.
- |
- | Line 360 : ^C13,0; # Vote ->
- | Yours Others->
- | ^M;^M;
- | Description : Line used above the results of the votes.
- |
- | Line 361 : ^C11,0;%1:02) %2.45 %3.12 %4:06 %5:06^M;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to display the voting
- | results.
- |
- | Line 362 : ^C15,0;^M; Total : ->
- | %1:06^M;->
- | ^M; Press Enter to continue.^A;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed below the vote results,
- | stating the total number of votes.
- |
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 61
-
- | Line 363 : ^C15,0; Add new vote selection (Enter ->
- | to discard) : ^M;^C14,1;^L60;^C15,0;^M;^M;
- | Description : Line used by Concord when the user can add
- | a new vote selection to the current
- | question.
- |
- | Line 364 : ^C14,0;Do you wish to get a receipt when ->
- | the recipient gets your message? (~1y/~2N)->
- | ^W;^M;
- | Description : Line used by Concord to ask the user if
- | he/she wants to receive a message when
- | sending mail and this mail is received by
- | the addressee.
- |
- | Line 365 : ^C12,0;You cannot share points to any ->
- | more selections. Press Enter.^A;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed by Concord when you have
- | shared all your available voting points.
- |
- | Line 366 : ^C12,0;You cannot change your vote for ->
- | this question. Press Enter.^A;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed by Concord when the user
- | wants to change his/her vote, but this is
- | not possible.
- |
- | Line 367 : ^C12,0;You cannot preview results before ->
- | voting. Press Enter.^A;^M;
- | Description : Used when the user cannot see the voting
- | results before voting him/herself.
- |
- | Line 368 : ^C12,0;You cannot delete this question. ->
- | Press Enter.^A;^M;
- | Description : Used by Concord when a user wants to delete
- | a vote question he/she did not write. (The
- | Sysop can delete questions even if he/she
- | did not write the question.)
- |
- | Line 369 : ^C12,0;You cannot add new selections for ->
- | this question. Press Enter.^A;^M;
- | Description : Line displayed when a user wants to add
- | answers to a vote question but is not
- | allowed to.
- |
- | Line 370 : ^C14,0;^E1;
- | Description : This line clears the screen. This line is
- | used after the more prompt. If you don't
- | want the screen to be cleared, clear this
- | line.
- |
- | Line 371 : ^C12,0;Do you really want to abort setting
- | areas? (~1Y/~2n) ^W;^M;
- | Description : Used when Concord asks the user if he/she
- | really wants to stop.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 62
-
- | Line 372 : ^C14,0;^X-80;File @TRUE_FILE_NAME@ found ->
- | from area @FAREA_NAME@.35
- | Description : Used when a file was found and Concord
- | displays where it was found.
- |
- | Line 373 :
- | Description : Currently an empty line.
- |
- | Line 374 :
- | Description : Currently an empty line.
-
- 3.5 File listings
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Ever wanted a BBS system where you could define how your file
- listings looked like? Well Concord allows you to define your own
- file listings. We've got three for you defined, but others can
- be added easily. You can change the things displayed, the colours
- used to display the text and more.
-
- Here's the explanation of the textlines in the language file:
-
- Line : ---
- Description : This line marks the beginning of the file
- list types. Do NOT edit! The --- defines a
- next selectable subject.
-
- Line : 8
- Description : Number of lines that define one file list
- type. This means that all file list types
- are taking up 8 lines in the following
- section.
-
- Line : ### SHORT FILE LIST .........//.......
- Description : Name of the first file list type. The ### in
- the LNG file defines a next string list.
-
- Now for the lines that make up the filelist. I've taken the short
- file list as example, but you can change, add, remove file lists
- as you like. The structure is always the same.
-
- Line 1 : Short file list
- | Description : Name of the file list type. This line should
- | not contain any special codes, but should be
- | plain ASCII.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 63
-
- Line 2 : ^C12,0;@FILE_TAGGED@ ^C14,0;@FILE_NAME->
- _EXT@^C11,0;@FILE_SIZE_KB@:04^C7,0;k ->
- ^C10,0;@FILE_DATE_SMALL@ ^C7,0;^C13,0;->
- @FILE_DLCOUNT@:02^C7,0 ^C15,0;->
- @FILE_DESC@.47^M;
- Description : This is the main line in the list. It
- contains the filename, size, date, download
- counter and the start of the file
- description, everything in different
- colours.
-
- Line 3 : ^C15,0; ->
- @FILE_DESC@.47^M;
- Description : This line is used to display the remaining
- of the description. The first bit is shown
- in line 2, up to 47 characters, and then
- this line is used as often as needed to
- display the rest of the description.
-
- Line 4 : ^C13,0;@FILE_TEXTLINE@^M;
- Description : Line used to display a textline from the
- FILES.BBS file, ie. a line with no filename
- and not belonging to a description.
-
- Line 5 : ^C14,0; @FILE_NAME_EXT@ ^C8,0;->
- OFFLINE ^C15,0;@FILE_DESC@.47^M;
- Description : Textline used by Concord instead of line 2
- when the file is missing ie. the description
- is in the file list but the file is not on
- the drive itself.
-
- Line 6 : ^C12,0;@FILE_TAGGED@ ^C15,1;->
- @FILE_NAME_EXT@
- Description : Line used by Concord to display the
- cursorline in the filelist. This marks the
- currently active line in the filelist. This
- called the cursor ON line. The line has to
- use the same outline as line 2, since this
- line is projected on top of line to, to mark
- it as active. Only the tag mark and the
- filename are needed.
-
- Line 7 : ^C12,0;@FILE_TAGGED@ ^C14,0;->
- @FILE_NAME_EXT@
- Description : Line used by Concord to restore the display
- to normal after the cursorline in the
- filelist has been displayed. This restores
- the colours to the normal display as in line
- 2. This called the cursor OFF line. The line
- has to use the same outline as line 6, since
- this line is projected on top of line to, to
- mark it as non active. Only the tag mark and
- the filename are needed.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 64
-
- Line 8 : ^C10,1;#^CP,P;
- Description : Used by Concord to highlight the
- 'searchword' in the filelist. Used when the
- user is searching files on keyword or
- filename.
-
- 3.6 Mail read listings
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Ever wanted a BBS system where you could define how your mail
- read listings looked like? Well Concord allows you to define your
- own listings. We've got two for you defined, but others can be
- added easily. You can change the things displayed, the colours
- used to display the text and more.
-
- Here's the explanation of the textlines in the language file:
-
- Line : ---
- Description : This line marks the beginning of the mail
- read list types. Do NOT edit! The ---
- defines a next selectable subject.
-
- Line : 14
- Description : Number of lines that define one mail read
- list type. This means that all mail read
- list types are taking up 14 lines in the
- following section.
-
- Line : ### SHORT READ MSG .........//.......
- Description : Name of the first file list type. The ### in
- the LNG file defines a next string list.
-
- Now for the lines that make up the mail read list. I've taken the
- short read messages list as example, but you can change, add,
- remove lists as you like. The structure is always the same.
-
- Line 1 : Fast read msg
- | Description : Description of the read list. This line
- | should not contain any special codes, but
- | should be plain ASCII.
-
- Line 2 : 04;00;02;10;11;07;-;+;Q;D;U;C;A;->
- P;N;S;J;H;M;G;R;W;/;K;#;=;F;E;T;);L
- Description : This line contains the information for the
- more prompt and the possible options. If you
- want a different key for a different action,
- this is the place where you make the
- changes. Here's an explanation:
-
- - Field 1 (04)
-
- Number of lines used as a header while
- reading messages. This can be a maximum
- of 5 lines. In this case it is 4 lines.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 65
-
- - Field 2 (00)
-
- - Field 3 (02)
-
- Number of lines used as a footer while
- reading messages. This can be a maximum
- of 5 lines. In this case it is 2 lines.
-
- - Field 4 (10)
-
- Text colour used to display the
- message. This colour is used to display
- the normal text. Quoted text is shown
- in the colour specified in field 5.
- (See below)
-
- - Field 5 (11)
-
- Quote text colour used to display the
- quotes in a message.
-
- - Field 6 (07)
-
- Colour used to display the origin line
- in the messages.
-
- - Field 7 (-)
-
- Previous reply key. Find previous reply
- in message chain.
-
- - Field 8 (+)
-
- Next reply key. Find next reply in
- message chain.
-
- - Field 9 (Q)
-
- Quit reading replies. Stop reading
- messages in reply chain and return to
- original message.
-
- - Field 10 (D)
-
- Page Down. Display previous page of the
- current message.
-
- - Field 11 (U)
-
- Page Up. Display next page of the
- current message.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 66
-
- - Field 12 (C)
-
- Continuous. Read message without
- stopping when end of page has been
- reached.
-
- - Field 13 (A)
-
- Again. Read current message again.
-
- - Field 14 (P)
-
- Previous message. Read the previous
- message in the message list. Note the
- difference with field 7.
-
- - Field 15 (N)
-
- Next message. Read the next message in
- the message list. Note the difference
- with field 8.
-
- - Field 16 (S)
-
- Stop reading. Stop reading messages and
- return to menu. Note the difference
- with field 9.
-
- - Field 17 (J)
-
- Jump to message. Jump to a message
- number in the current area. Concord
- will ask to which message number to
- jump.
-
- - Field 18 (H)
-
- Help. Displays the help file
- READMSG.ANS.
-
- - Field 19 (M)
-
- Mark message. Mark a message so you can
- read it later.
-
- - Field 20 (G)
-
- Goto area. Change message area.
-
- - Field 21 (R)
-
- Reply. Reply to the current message.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 67
-
- - Field 22 (W)
-
- Write new message. Write a new message
- in the current area.
-
- - Field 23 (/)
-
- Find message. Search for a message in
- the current area.
-
- - Field 24 (K)
-
- Keep unread. Do not mark this message
- as read. Normally a message read by the
- addressee is marked as received. this
- option allows you to remove that
- status.
-
- - Field 25 (#)
-
- Delete. Remove the current message from
- the system. Concord will ask if you are
- sure to remove the message.
-
- - Field 26 (=)
-
- Toggle private/public. This allows you
- to toggle the private flag on or off
- for the current message. If it was on
- it is turned off and the other way
- around.
-
- - Field 27 (F)
-
- Forward. Forward the current message to
- another user and/or another area.
-
- - Field 28 (E)
-
- Edit. Edit the current message.
-
- - Field 29 (T)
-
- Toggle pointer. Set last read pointer
- to the current message in the current
- area.
-
- - Field 30 ())
-
- | Writes message to file EXPORT.TXT.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 68
-
- - Field 31 (L)
-
- List messages. Displays a list of the
- messages in the current area.
-
- Remember that you cannot use the same
- character twice!
-
- Line 3 : ^C14,0;^E1; From: ^C15,0;@MSG_FROM@.35 ->
- ^C15,0;@MSG_NUM@/@MAREA_MAX@ ->
- (@MAREA_SHORT@)^M;
- Description : First of the header lines. You can have a
- maximum of 5 header lines. These lines give
- the user information about the addressee of
- the message, the sender, date, subject and
- other information.
-
- Line 4 : ^C14,0; To: ^C15,0;@MSG_TO@.35 ->
- ^C15,0;@MSG_DATE:08 @MSG_TIME@:05 ->
- ^C7,0;@MSG_PREVREP@<->@MSG_NEXTREP@ ->
- ^C13,0;@MSG_RCVD@:01^M;
- Description : Second line of the header.
-
- Line 5 : ^C14,0; Subj: ^C15,0;@MSG_SUBJ@^M;
- Description : Third line of the header.
-
- Line 6 : _____________ //__________________
- Description : Fourth line of the header.
-
- Line 7 : <empty>
- Description : Header line number 5.
-
- Line 8 : ^C7,0;(%1)^CN,N;
- Description :
-
- Line 9 : ____________ // __________________
- Description : First line of the footer. A maximum of 5
- footer lines is allowed. These are shown
- under the message.
-
- Line 10 : ^C15,0; Pg^C7;[^C14;D^C7;]^C15;n ->
- Pg^C7;[^C14;U^C7;]^C15;p ->
- ^C7;[^C14;P^C7;]^C15;rev ->
- ^C7;[^C14;N^C7;]^C15;ext ->
- ^C7;[^C14;R^C7;]^C15;eply ->
- ^C7;[^C14;J^C7;]^C15;ump ->
- ^C7;[^C14;S^C7;]^C15;top ->
- ^C7;[^C14;H^C7;]^C15;elp
- Description : The second line of the footer. In this
- example it is the line that displays some of
- the keys defined in line 2.
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 69
-
- Line 11 : <empty>
- Description : The third line of the footer.
-
- Line 12 : <empty>
- Description : Footer line number 4.
-
- Line 13 : <empty>
- Description : Footer line number 5.
-
- Line 14 : ^C10,1;#^CP,P;
- Description : Line used by Concord to highlight the words
- found when doing a search.
-
- That's it folks. Experiment as much as you want, but remember to
- make a backup!
-
- | 3.7 Updating a language file
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | During the time you work with Concord you probably make changes
- | to the language file to reflect your own BBS style. When a new
- | release is available of Concord, it would be silly to make these
- | changes again to the new language file, so here is a method of
- | updating your language file.
- |
- | Leave your language file as it is and enter the configuration
- | program CSETUP. Select CONFIGURATION and then the language file.
- | Select your language file from the list and goto the end of the
- | file. All lines added since the last release of Concord will be
- | empty. Goto the empty line, press ^C, which means that the
- | default textline will be placed on the line. Now you can make
- | your adjustments to the new lines and you can than save the file,
- | compile it and you're ready to run.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 3 - Page 70
-
- Chapter 4 - Menu system
- =================================================================
-
- 4.1 General information
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Menus are the main part of your BBS system. Without a menu your
- users would not know what to do and where to go, so it is
- important that you create menus.
-
- Concord allows you to create your own menus. There is a default
- set of menus supplied with this archive, but to personalize your
- own BBS, you should create your own menus.
-
- The menus within Concord consists of two parts. The first part
- is the screen that is shown to the user. This can be an ASCII,
- ANSI, AVATAR or RIP screen. The only screen that has to be made
- is the ANSI screen. To create these screens, you will need an
- editor, like A3E or Thedraw. Concord has a build in conversion
- for users who are using ASCII, AVATAR and RIP. However, building
- special RIP files can enhance your BBS. If Concord finds a
- textfile with the specified name and a RIP, AVT or ASC extension,
- it will use this file instead of the screen type conversion build
- into Concord. So in short, and this is for all textfiles for
- Concord:
-
- - *.ANS files Mandatory
- - *.ASC files Optional
- - *.AVT files Optional
- - *.RIP files Optional
-
- The second part of a menu is the configuration part. This can be
- made in two ways, either an ASCII file or with the use of the
- menu editor. Both methods are used by Sysops, so it's up to you
- to choose or maybe use both together.
-
- There are several ways of creating a menu structure. The most
- used one looks like this:
-
- ------------- Message areas
- |
- Main menu -----|------------ File areas
- |
- |------------ Other menu 1
- |
- ------------- Other menu 2
-
- Another method is to group items:
-
- Main menu ------------------ Concord files & messages
- |
- |------------ General files & messages
- |
- |------------ Other area 1
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 1
-
- Either way, plan your menu structure carefully. Users like a menu
- structure that is easy to follow.
-
- 4.2 Building a menu
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Before we have a look at the different menu types, let's see how
- we can build a menu. First we use the ASCII editor method.
-
- Note that you can use more than one menu option with the same
- execute key. This allows you to perform more than one menu
- command while the user only has to press 1 key. Concord will
- execute these commands from top to bottom.
-
- Also note that some of the optional data fields are used
- internally by Concord and can not be used directly by the user
- without writing a scriptfile to enter some information needed.
-
- 4.2.1 ASCII menus
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The format for the textfiles is as follows:
-
- <Hotkey> <Input> <Cmd> "<Data>" <Sec>,<Bpsrate>,<Age>,
- <Flag A>,<Flag B>.......
-
- Note that the line is split here to fit on the page. Normally
- this is all on one line! The <> brackets are not typed.
-
- Here's an explanation of all fields:
-
- Field : Hotkey
- Description : Key that determines the type of action with
- this command. There are 4 special keys
- available:
-
- # Automatic menu type. This command is
- executed automatically when the menu is
- accessed. You have to use this for menu
- option which will need to be executed
- without any user interference, like
- displaying the menu ANS, ASC, AVT or
- RIP file.
-
- $ Select menu type. This command is used
- for menu options that are available
- within Concord by using cursor keys to
- select an option and then activating
- the option by pressing ENTER. This key
- means the action to perform for this
- menu. This option is always used in
- conjunction with the following option.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 2
-
- £ Select cursor. The text behind this
- command is displayed on screen. You
- will have to use this option 2 times
- after each $ command. The first is the
- cursor 'ON' line, the second the cursor
- 'OFF' line. The pound sign is generated
- by depressing the ALT key and then wile
- the ALT key is still pressed, pressing
- 156 on the numerical part of you
- keyboard. (£ = Alt-156)
-
- % Escape. This means that the ESC key
- needs to be pressed.
-
- In all other cases the hotkey is the same as
- the next option, the input key.
-
- Field : Input
- Description : Command that defines the key that will
- execute the menu command. When the user
- presses this key, the menu command will be
- executed. This can be any key that is
- available on the keyboard.
-
- Field : Command
- Description : The code that represents the menu command.
- See 4.3 for a list of all menu commands. The
- | $ in front of the menu commands listed below
- | is not entered when creating ASCII menus.
- | Appendix C will also list the available menu
- commands.
-
- Field : "Data"
- Description : Optional data field. Here you specify the
- optional behaviour to some of the menu
- commands. See the menu commands for the
- available commands that you can use in this
- field. The 'data' has to be entered between
- "....." to set it apart from the other
- | options on the textline. Spaces can be used
- | in this option.
-
- Field : SecLvl
- Description : Security level. This is the security level
- needed by the user to access this menu
- option. This level has to be between 0 and
- 32000.
-
- Field : Bpsrate
- Description : Minimum BPS rate needed to access this menu
- command. If the user is accessing your
- system on a lower BPS rate, he/she will not
- be able to use this menu command.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 3
-
- Field : Age
- Description : Minimum age needed to access this menu
- option. If the user is younger than the age
- specified he/she will not get access to this
- menu option.
-
- Field : Flag A, Flag B.....
- Description : Flagsetting for this menu command. You can
- specify up to 80 flags. A1 to A8 up to J1 to
- J8. Either flag has the option to be ON, OFF
- or "Don't care".
-
- X This means the flag is ON.
-
- O This means the flag is OFF.
-
- - This means don't care.
-
- ON means the user must have this flag set to
- access the menu option. OFF means the user
- must not have set this flag and "Don't care"
- means that it makes no difference if the
- flag is on or off, the user can access the
- menu option, providing that the other
- settings are correct.
-
- What you got to do is build your menu line by line, always
- beginning the menu with an automatic command to display the
- textfile belonging to the menu. Unless it is a menu that has no
- textfile, like a completely automatic command menu. Here's a
- small example of a menu textline:
-
- A A 0006 "DATA" 100,,18,XXX---XX,OOO--OOO,--------,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
-
- This could also be written as:
-
- A A 0006 "DATA" 100,,18,XXX---XX,OOO--OOO
-
- | The use of the dollar sign ($) is not needed when entering menu
- | options in the ASCII menus.
-
- This is done to make editing easy. You don't have to enter every
- comma for all flagsettings if you don't use them. They will all
- be set to 'Don't care' if they are not entered.
-
- Leaving a setting empty also makes it as 'Don't care', like
- between the 100 and the 18 in the above example.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 4
-
- When done editing your menu, you will need to compile it, so
- Concord is able to use the menu. This is done by running the
- GENUTIL.EXE program. Here's the command line:
-
- GENUTIL MENU <menu name(s)>
-
- The menu name can have wildchars in it to compile more than one
- menu at the same time. To compile a menu called TOP.TXT you would
- call GENUTIL like his:
-
- GENUTIL MENU TOP.TXT
-
- To compile every menu in the menu directory, you would call
- GENUTIL like this:
-
- GENUTIL MENU *.*
-
- This will create a compiled menu file with the MNU extension.
-
- 4.2.2 Menu editor
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The other way of building menus is with the menu editor. This
- program is called MENUED.EXE. This program will directly create
- your menus in compiled version. You don't have to compile your
- menus with GENUTIL anymore.
-
- Note that menus that are created using the ASCII file method can
- be edited with MENUED.EXE after they are compiled with GENUTIL.
-
- When MENUED is started, a screen with two boxes is displayed. The
- top box informs you about the keys that are available The bottom
- one displays the available menus and the directories. Use the
- cursor keys to select the menu file you want or the directory you
- want to change to. Press SPACE or ENTER to open the menu file or
- change directory.
-
- Press N to start a new menu file. This will ask for the menu
- filename to create.
-
- Once you have entered a new filename or selected a existing menu,
- you will briefly see the ANSI file belonging to that menu and
- then you are in the edit screen for the menu types.
-
- The following keys are available in the menu editor here:
-
- Alt-A Add menu line to menu
- Alt-D Remove line from menu
- F1 Display Concord manual
- F2 Display ANSI file belonging to menu
- ESC Return to edit window
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 5
-
- The arrow keys allow you to move within the menu editor. Pressing
- Shift-Arrow keys allows you to move a menu line up or down,
- depending on the arrow key that was pressed.
-
- The following fields are available in the menu editor:
-
- Field : Key
- Description : Key that determines the type of action with
- this command. There are 4 special keys
- available:
-
- # Automatic menu type. This command is
- executed automatically when the menu is
- accessed. You have to use this for menu
- option which will need to be executed
- without any user interference, like
- displaying the menu ANS, ASC, AVT or
- RIP file. This option is displayed as
- AUT in the key field.
-
- $ Select menu type. This command is used
- for menu options that are available
- within Concord by using cursor keys to
- select an option and then activating
- the option by pressing ENTER. This key
- means the action to perform for this
- menu. This option is always used in
- conjunction with the following option.
- This option is displayed as SEL in the
- key field.
-
- £ Select cursor. The text behind this
- command is displayed on screen. You
- will have to use this option 2 times
- after each $ command. The first is the
- cursor 'ON' line, the second the cursor
- 'OFF' line. The pound sign is generated
- by depressing the ALT key and then wile
- the ALT key is still pressed, pressing
- 156 on the numerical part of you
- keyboard. (£ = Alt-156)
-
- % Escape. This means that the ESC key
- needs to be pressed.
-
- In all other cases the hotkey is the same as
- the next option, the input key.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 6
-
- Field : Input
- Description : Command that defines the key that will
- execute the menu command. When the user
- presses this key, the menu command will be
- executed. This can be any key that is
- available on the keyboard. Automatic
- commands have the # symbol in this field.
-
- Field : Menu type
- Description : The menutype. Pressing ENTER here will
- display a menu with all available menu types
- sorted per group. Here's a short list of
- which command is in what group.
-
- General
- Goto menu
- Gosub menu
- Return from gosub
- Logoff
- Show ANSI with hotkeys
- Show ANSI without hotkeys
- Show ANSI with ENTER
- Run script
- Run external program
- Exit to OS with errorlevel
- Yell Sysop
- Run form
- Multinode chat
-
- BBS list
- Show BBS list
- Add BBS to list
- Change BBS in list
- Remove BBS from list
- Verify BBS in list
- View edit BBS list
- Download BBS list
- Check user's BBS
-
- Files
- Show file list
- Show new files
- Search on filemask
- Search on keyword
- Goto previous file area
- Goto next file area
- Select file area
- Select combined file area
- View file
- Unpack files to TEMP directory
- Pack files in TEMP directory
- Copy files to TEMP directory
- List files in TEMP directory
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 7
-
- Erase files in TEMP directory
- View files in TEMP directory
- Move files to another area
- Check tagged files
- Upload files
- Download files
- Set combined file areas
- | Create new files list
- | Copy flagged files to temp dir
- | Check file attaches
- | Attach file to user
- | Kill files in attach path
-
- Messages
- Goto previous mail area
- Goto next mail area
- Select mail area
- Select combined mail area
- | Quickscan messages (3x)
- | Read messages (3x)
- Read combined area messages
- Write message
- Personal mail scan
- Read marked messages
- Download offline mail packet
- Upload offline mail packet
- Set combined mail areas
-
- Doors
- Goto previous door
- Goto next door
- Select door
- Run door
-
- Others
- Edit user info
- Show who is on
- | Show last callers (2x)
- Show userlist
- Set cursor location
- | Show bulletins (2x)
- Show last user comment
- Add last user comment
- Check user's view file
- Analyze user screen size
- Redraw screen
- Set temp. command line mode
- Force INCLUDE.MNU off
- Run SBBS .Q-A file
- | Show aphorism
- | Age statistics
-
- See chapter 4.3 for a complete list of all
- menu types and the available options.
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 8
-
- Field : Datafield
- Description : Optional data field. Here you specify the
- optional behaviour to some of the menu
- commands. See the menu commands for the
- available commands that you can use in this
- field.
-
- Field : Sec
- Description : Security settings for this menu command.
- Pressing ENTER here will display a window
- with the following options:
-
- Sec. level Level needed to access this
- menu option. The user must
- have a security level equal
- or higher than the level
- specified here to gain
- access to the menu option.
-
- Flags Flagsettings. Settings
- needed to gain access to
- this menu option. Press
- SPACE to activate the flag
- edit window.
-
- Age Age needed to access this
- menu option.
-
- Bps rate Minimum BPS rate needed to
- access this menu option.
-
- Pressing ESC will bring you back to the
- normal edit window.
-
- When you are done editing, pressing ESC will display the window
- to confirm if you want to save the menu.
-
- | 4.2.3 Creating selection menus
- | -----------------------------------------------------------------
- |
- | creating selection menus is easier than you think, because
- | Concord will do all the hard work for you. First design your ANSI
- | screens for your menus. Create the menus with at least one line,
- | which displays the ANSI file. When you have done this select the
- | menu to which you want to add the selection menu options. Concord
- | will display the ANSI file and then show you the menu list. Press
- | F2 to display the ANSI screen. Move your cursor to the start of
- | the selection menu. Press SPACE. Move to the end of the selection
- | menu and press SPACE again. Now you will see a bar that
- | represents your menu selection. Press ENTER and Concord will add
- | three lines to your menu. Change the settings in these lines to
- | what you want and your selection menu option is done.
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 9
-
- 4.3 Menu options
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Here's a complete list of all available menu options. This list
- is still expanding, so new menu options might be available in new
- releases of Concord.
-
- The following notation will be used to explain the menu options:
-
- Menu number : Number of this menu option. This is the
- number that you can use in the ASCII method
- of making menus or in the scriptfiles
- available with Concord. Although the full
- number includes a $, I will mostly just talk
- about a menu option without this character.
- So if I write menu type 8, I mean menu type
- $0008.
- Menu name : Name of this menu option.
- Description : Description of this menu option and how it
- behaves. In some cases this can be depending
- on the optional data options available for
- the menu type.
- Data syntax : The format of the optional data line.
- Mandatory data : List of options for this menu type that
- needs to be specified. The options mentioned
- in the Extra options field are optional, the
- option mentioned in this field, Mandatory
- data, are mandatory and need to be
- specified.
- Extra options : Any extra menu options that can be included
- in the optional data field, like opening
- hours etc. These are optional, the options
- mentioned in the Mandatory data field must
- be defined.
-
- Options in [] brackets are optional. Options in <> brackets have
- to be replaced by a string. This could be a filename or a
- searchstring.
-
- If you have problems understanding a menu option we suggest you
- have a look at the included default menus in the Concord archive.
- If you still have problems, contact one of the support sites.
-
- Note that when you use the menu numbers in text and scriptfiles,
- you are allowed to remove any preceding 0's. So menu option 0003
- is the same as 3.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 10
-
- Menu number : $0001
- Menu name : MENU_GOTO
- Description : Changes to the menu specified in the
- optional data field. This jump is without
- adding this menu to the stack of menus
- you've visited. (See menu option 2 for more
- information about this.)
- Data syntax : [/THH:MM-HH:MM] [/Ppassword] <menuname>
- Mandatory data : Name of the menu to jump to, without the
- .MNU extension. The menu name is the last
- item on the optional data line.
- Extra options : /THH:MM-HH:MM
- Opening and closing hours of this menu
- option. The first HH:MM is the opening time
- of this menu option in hours and minutes,
- the second HH:MM is the closing time in
- hours and minutes. Use the 24 hour notation
- method for these fields.
-
- /Ppassword
- The /P option is followed by the password
- needed to gain access to this menu option.
- When a password is present, Concord will ask
- the user for the password. Only if the
- password is correct will Concord give
- access.
-
- Menu number : $0002
- Menu name : MENU_GOSUB
- Description : Jump to the menu specified in the optional
- data field and add the menu you jump from to
- the stack of menus visited. This allows you
- to use menu command 3 and return from a menu
- to the previous menu. This is not possible
- when using menu command 1.
- Data syntax : See menu 1.
- Mandatory data : See menu 1.
- Extra options : See menu 1.
-
- Menu number : $0003
- menu name : MENU_RETURN
- Description : Return to previous menu. This command looks
- in the stack of menus visited and return to
- the last one entered in that list. If the
- option is used again without adding a menu
- to the stack, this menu option will jump to
- the before last menu option.
- Data syntax : [/THH:MM-HH:MM] [/Ppassword] [<menuname> /
- "*"]
- Mandatory data : Normally you don't have to enter anything
- here, because Concord jumps back to the last
- menu in the menu stack.
- >> Continued >>
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 11
-
- Extra options : /THH:MM-HH:MM
- Opening and closing hours of this menu
- option. The first HH:MM is the opening time
- of this menu option in hours and minutes,
- the second HH:MM is the closing time in
- hours and minutes. Use the 24 hour notation
- method for these fields.
-
- /Ppassword
- The /P option is followed by the password
- needed to gain access to this menu option.
- When a password is present, Concord will ask
- the user for the password. Only if the
- password is correct will Concord give
- access.
-
- <menuname>
- Name of the menu to jump to.
-
- "*"
- Tells Concord to jump to the menu defined as
- TOP menu.
-
- Menu number : $0004
- Menu name : MENU_LOGOFF
- Description : Menu command to leave the BBS and hangup the
- phone.
- Data syntax : [/NOHANGUP] [/IMMEDIATE] [/<errorlevel>]
- | [/RESTORECHANGES]
- Mandatory data : Normally you use this command without any
- options. When this menu command is used,
- Concord will look for a scriptfile called
- GOODBYE.SCR and execute the commands in this
- scriptfile. See the chapter about the
- scriptfiles for more information.
- Extra options : /NOHANGUP
-
- /IMMEDIATE
- Concord will disconnect immediate, without
- starting the scriptfile GOODBYE.SCR.
-
- /<errorlevel>
- Concord will exit with the errorlevel
- specified in the optional data field. This
- must be the last option on the textline.
- Your batchfile should intercept this
- errorlevel and continue. Normally Concord
- exits with errorlevel 0.
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 12
-
- | /RESTORECHANGES
- | This option allows you not to store the
- | changes the user made in the userrecord.
- | Very useful when you have a GUEST account
- | and don't want your users to keep changing
- | the options of that account.
-
- Menu number : $0005
- Menu name : MENU_SHOWHOT
- Description : Show a textfile with hotkeys available. This
- option is mostly used to display the ANSI
- file belonging to the menu file. This menu
- type allows the user to press a key defined
- in the menu before the whole ANSI file is
- displayed. Menu type 8 will first display
- the file and than look if the user pressed
- a key or not, while this menu type will do
- so during the display also. Displaying the
- file depends on the settings from the user.
- If the user has RIP turned on and there is
- a file with the correct name and a RIP
- extension, this file is used instead of the
- ANSI file.
- Data syntax : <filename>
- Mandatory data : You will have to enter the filename to
- display. Do not enter the extension, unless
- you want only to display the file specified.
- You can use the filename only or use a
- complete path and filename. If only the
- filename is given, Concord will search the
- default text path and the main directory for
- the file.
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $0006
- Menu name : MENU_SCRIPT
- Description : Run a Concord script file. These files can
- contain almost all available menu commands
- and script file commands and are very
- powerful. See the chapter on scriptfiles for
- more information about the commands
- available. Note that the script file
- mentioned here is a Concord scriptfile, not
- a SuperBBS .Q-A file.
- | Data syntax : <scriptfile name> [/JUMP:Label] [Scriptpar.]
- Mandatory data : Name of the scriptfile to run. The .SCR
- extension is not needed.
- | Extra options : /JUMP:Label
- | Label in the scriptfile to jump to. This
- | allows you to use one big scriptfile and
- | jump to a part of the scriptfile you need
- | using labels. This works the same as the
- | GOTO command in the script language.
- | >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 13
-
- | [Scriptparameters]
- | Script parameters can be used with:
- |
- | PARAM variable = type
- |
- | command just as in the goto/gosub menutypes.
-
- Menu number : $0007
- Menu name : MENU_EDIT
- Description : This menu commands allows you to edit the
- user information.
- Data syntax : <Command>
- Mandatory data : Name of the item to edit. Some of these
- commands need extra text lines added in the
- optional data field, some work without extra
- textlines. This is noted with every option.
- Command can be one of the following options,
- in alphabetical order:
-
- | ADDRESS
- | Allows you to change the address which is
- | contained in the userlist.
-
- ALIAS
- Allows the user to change the alias of
- | his/her userrecord. No text line needed.
-
- BULLETCHK
- Allows the user to toggle bulletin check on
- or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- CHARSET
- Allows the user to select another character
- | set. No text line needed.
-
- CITY
- Allows the user to change the city of
- | his/her userrecord. No text line needed.
-
- COLORS
- Allows the user to toggle colors on and off.
- This is a Yes/No field.
-
- DATA
- Allows the user to change the DATA phone
- | number of his/her userrecord. No text line
- | needed.
-
- EDITOR
- Allows the user to select a default full
- | screen editor. No text line needed.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 14
-
- FILECHK
- Allows the user to toggle the filecheck on
- or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- HOTKEYS
- Allows the user to toggle hotkeys on or off.
- This is a Yes/No field.
-
- LANGUAGE
- Allows the user to change the language used.
- | No text line needed.
-
- MAILCHK
- Allows the user to toggle mailcheck on or
- off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- | OFFLINEFORMAT
- | Allows you to change the offline mail
- | format.
-
- PACKER
- Allows the user to select a default
- | archiver. No text line needed.
-
- PASSWORD
- Allows the user to change the password of
- | his/her userrecord. No text line needed.
-
- PKT_ALLPERSONAL
- Allows the user to toggle the setting about
- receiving mail to ALL as personal on or off.
- This is a Yes/No question.
-
- PKT_GOODBYE
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the file GOODBYE.ANS in the offline mail
- packet on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_LASTREAD
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the last read pointer file in the offline
- mail packet on or off. This is a Yes/No
- field.
-
- PKT_MARKREAD
- Allows the user to toggle the setting about
- marking all personal mail as received in the
- offline mail packet. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_MAXMSGS
- Allows the user to change the number of
- messages in the offline mail packet.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 15
-
- PKT_NEWBULLETS
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the new bulletins in the offline mail packet
- on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_NEWFILES
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the new files list in the offline mail
- packet on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_NEWS
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the file NEWS.ANS in the offline mail packet
- on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_NOOWNMSGS
- Allows the user to toggle the option for
- receiving own mail in the offline mail
- packets on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PKT_OFFLINE
- Allows the user to change the type of
- offline mail packets.
-
- PKT_WELCOME
- Allows the user to toggle the inclusion of
- the file WELCOME.ANS in the offline mail
- packet on or off. This is a Yes/No field.
-
- PROTOCOL
- Allows the user to select a default
- protocol.
-
- SCREENLEN
- Allows the user to change the screenlength
- he/she is using.
-
- VOICE
- Allows the user to change the VOICE phone
- number of his/her userrecord
-
- You can only use one command per menu line.
- Not all of these commands react the same,
- some might display a list to choose from,
- others need some more work. See the default
- menus for an example.
- Extra options : None.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 16
-
- Menu number : $0008
- Menu name : MENU_SHOWFILE
- Description : Display a textfile to the user. This can be
- an ASCII, ANSI, AVT (Avatar) or RIP file,
- depending on the type of emulation used by
- the user. This command does not monitor key
- presses during display of the file, as menu
- command 5 does. Use this command to display
- normal files and use menu command 5 to
- display menu textfiles.
- Data syntax : <filename>
- Mandatory data : You will have to enter the filename to
- display. Do not enter the extension, unless
- you want only to display the file specified.
- You can use the filename only or use a
- complete path and filename. If only the
- filename is given, Concord will search the
- default text path and the main directory for
- the file.
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $0009
- Menu name : MENU_EXEC
- Description : Menu command to execute external programs,
- like utilities. Concord will swap to DOS and
- execute the program specified. You can use
- several options to specify how Concord
- should behave. When the external program is
- finished, Concord reloads and displays the
- menu again.
- Data syntax : <filename> [<parameters>] [<options>]
- Mandatory data : Filename of the program to run. This can be
- a filename only, but we suggest that you
- always use the full path, so Concord will
- execute the correct program.
- Extra options : <parameters>
- Parameters needed to run the external
- program. This depends on the program that
- you want to run. See the manual from the
- program for more information about this.
-
- <options>
- These are options to control Concord's
- behaviour when shelling to DOS. The
- following options are available:
-
- *B Replaced by the current BPS rate.
- *C Replaced by the current COMSPEC
- settings. The COMSPEC is your path and
- filename of your command.com file.
- *D1- Informs Concord NOT to create a
- DORINFOx.DEF file. This file is needed
- by some external programs to receive
- user information.
- >> Continued >>
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 17
-
- *D2- Informs Concord NOT to create a
- DOOR.SYS file. This file is needed by
- some programs to receive user
- information.
- *D3- Informs Concord NOT to create an
- EXITINFO.BBS file. This file is needed
- by some programs to receive user
- information.
- *E- Informs Concord NOT to create an
- EXITINFO.DAT file. This file is needed
- by some programs to receive user
- information and is a special Concord
- file which allows more info to be send
- to the external program than the normal
- EXITINFO.BBS file.
- *F Replaced by user's FIRST name.
- *G Replaced by user's colour mode.
- *J Replaced by user's screen length.
- *L Replaced by user's LAST name.
- *N Replaced by current node.
- *P Replaced by current COM port.
- *R Replaced by user's record number in the
- userlist.
- *S Number of kilobytes to swap. This
- command takes a parameter in the
- following format: *S<minmemkb>, which
- is the amount in Kilobytes of the
- memory to swap.
- *T Replaced by user's time left in
- minutes.
-
- These options allow you to influence the way
- Concord and the external program will
- behave. Concord is capable of creating a
- DORINFOx.DEF, DOOR.SYS, EXITINFO.BBS and
- EXITINFO.DAT file. So any program that uses
- any of these files can be used with Concord.
- | Please note that some commands might need
- | menu option 19 (See below) to clear the
- | screen after making a selection.
-
- Menu number : $000A
- Menu name : MENU_ERRLVL
- Description : Exits to the main batchfile with the
- errorlevel specified in the optional data
- field. When Concord is reloaded with -R
- option, it returns to the menu where you
- started the menu option from. This option
- removes Concord completely from memory until
- it is restarted.
- Data syntax : [*D1-] [*D2-] <errorlevel>
-
-
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 18
-
- Mandatory data : You will have to specify the errorlevel that
- Concord will be exiting with. Do not use
- errorlevels below 10 as these are used for
- program errors and other actions from
- Concord.
- Extra option : *D1- Informs Concord NOT to create a
- DORINFOx.DEF file. This file is needed
- by some external programs to receive
- user information.
- *D2- Informs Concord NOT to create a
- DOOR.SYS file. This file is needed by
- some programs to receive user
- information.
-
- Note that with this menu option not all exit
- options are available as in menu type 9.
-
- Menu number : $000B
- Menu name : MENU_YELL
- Description : Menu command to page the Sysop for a chat.
- Concord will use the sound device configured
- in the configuration program to warn the
- Sysop that somebody wants to talk to
- him/her.
- Data syntax : [/FORCED] [<defaultpagereason>
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /FORCED
- This option allows the chat function to be
- active, even if the page times specified in
- the configuration program say that paging
- hours are over. This could be handy for
- certain users, like a Co-Sysop, so he/she
- might be able to page you even outside page
- hours.
-
- <defaultpagereason>
- When a default page reason is defined,
- Concord will use this as the reason for the
- page. If this option is not used, Concord
- will ask the user what the reason for the
- page is.
-
- Menu number : $000C
- Menu name : MENU_WHOISON
- Description : This menu option displays a list of all
- users online on all lines or let's you
- search for a user online.
- Data syntax : [<searchstring>]
- Mandatory data : None
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 19
-
- Extra options : <searchstring>
- Allows you to enter a username to search for
- in the online users. You can use a
- scriptfile to ask the user what name to
- search for and than start the menu option
- with the given string as the searchstring.
-
- Menu number : $000D
- Menu name : MENU_LASTCALL
- Description : Shows a list of the last callers to the
- system. This can be a list of the last x
- callers or the callers from the current day.
- Data syntax : [/TODAY] [/<numberoflastcallers>]
- [<searchstr>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /TODAY
- This option allows you to display only the
- callers that have called the current day. If
- the user is the first caller, this will be
- displayed.
-
- /<numberoflastcallers>
- Number of callers to display in the list. By
- default this is 15. Concord will display the
- users of more than 1 day if needed to fill
- the list.
-
- <searchstring>
- Allows you to enter a username to search for
- in the lastcallers list. You can use a
- scriptfile to ask the user what name to
- search for and than start the menu option
- with the given string as the searchstring.
-
- Menu number : $000E
- Menu name : SHOWUSERS
- Description : Shows the userlist of the system to the
- user. This can be done in several ways,
- depending on the control file.
- Data syntax : <Listtype> [<searchstr>]
- Mandatory data : You have to give the listtype as defined in
- the file LISTS.CTL. This file contains the
- layout for the list. You can add, delete or
- change any of the available listtypes. See
- the chapter on control files for an
- explanation about the options in the list
- control file.
- Extra options : <searchstr>
- Allows you to enter a username to search for
- in the userlist. You can use a scriptfile to
- ask the user what name to search for and
- than start the menu option with the given
- string as the searchstring.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 20
-
- Menu number : $000F
- Menu name : MENU_SHOWBBS
- Description : Shows the internal BBS list to the user. The
- user will be able to search for a specific
- BBS name.
- Data syntax : [<searchstring>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <searchstring>
- Allows you to enter a BBS name to search for
- in the BBS list. You can use a scriptfile to
- ask the user what name to search for and
- than start the menu option with the given
- string as the searchstring.
-
- Menu number : $0010
- Menu name : MENU_EDITBBS
- Description : Menu option to allow the user to change,
- add, remove or verify the BBS information of
- his/her BBS.
- Data syntax : [/ADD] [/CHANGE] [/REMOVE] [/VERIFY]
- Mandatory data : You can use one of the following options as
- optional data. Only one command is allowed
- at a time. Concord uses the BBSLIST?.* files
- in your main directory to display the
- information when entering or changing BBS
- information.
-
- /ADD
- Add a BBS to the list. The user can enter
- information like BBS name, telephone number,
- network addresses etc.
-
- /CHANGE
- Change the BBS information. This can only be
- done by the user who entered the
- information.
-
- /REMOVE
- Remove a BBS from the BBSlist. This can only
- be done by the person who entered the
- information.
-
- /VERIFY
- This option allows the Sysop of the BBS to
- verify that his/her BBS is still
- operational. The verify date will be set to
- the date that is was verified. Concord has
- the option to automatically, after a certain
- amount of days, ask the user who entered the
- information, if the BBS is still
- operational.
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 21
-
- The Sysop of the BBS where the BBS list is
- on will also have the options to edit,
- verify, add and remove BBSses from the list.
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $0011
- Menu name : MENU_DOWNBBS
- Description : This menu option allows your users to
- download the internal BBS list.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $0012
- Menu name : MENU_SETCURSOR
- Description : Allows you to place the cursor on any
- location on the screen. The top left hand
- corner is 0,0. The top right hand corner is
- 80,0. Bottom left is (with 25 lines on
- screen) 0,25 and the bottom right is 80,25.
- You can place the cursor anywhere you want
- by defining the X and Y location.
- Data syntax : <x>,<y>[,<string>]
- Mandatory data : You have to enter the location for the
- cursor in x,y format.
- Extra options : <string>
- String to be displayed at the given cursor
- location. this string could, for example, be
- used to display the commandline at the
- bottom of your menus.
-
- Menu number : $0013
- Menu name : MENU_CHECKBBS
- Description : Menu option allowing you to check the date
- that a BBS owned by the person logging on
- was verified. If the date is longer ago then
- the number of days specified in the
- configuration, the user is asked if the BBS
- still is operational or that it has to be
- removed from the list. This helps your
- internal BBS list keep up to date.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $0014
- Menu name : MENU_CHECKBULL
- Description : Menu option that displays the bulletin list
- or searches for new bulletins, depending on
- the optional data.
- | Data syntax : [/NEW] [/SHOW] <bulletinname>
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 22
-
- Mandatory data : Name of the control file for the bulletins.
- This is an ASCII file with the format
- "Bulletin description" followed by the
- "Bulletin name". See the example included in
- the Concord archive for more information.
- Extra options : /NEW
- Only shows the bulletins when there are new
- bulletins since the last check.
-
- | /SHOW
- | Show bulletin file without showing the
- | bulletinlist first.
-
- Menu number : $0015
- Menu name : MENU_SHOWENTER
- Description : Same menu option as menu type 8, only the
- line "Press ENTER to continue..." is
- displayed at the end of the file and Concord
- waits for the user to press ENTER.
- Data syntax : See menu type 8.
- Mandatory data : See menu type 8.
- Extra options : See menu type 8.
-
- Menu number : $0016
- Menu name : MENU_LASTCMT
- Description : This menu option has everything to do with
- the last user comment option in Concord. It
- allows your user to write a comment and view
- the comment from the last user. This option
- is mostly used in the logoff menu, but you
- are free to change that.
- Data syntax : [/SHOW] [/NOKILL] [/ADD] [/nn]
- Mandatory data : At least one of the extra options.
- Extra options : /SHOW
- This will display the comment the last user
- has made. If there is no comment, Concord
- will do nothing with this menu option.
-
- /NOKILL
- Concord will not kill the last user comment,
- so it is available to all users until a new
- one is entered. Normally the comment is
- cleared after the next user logged off
- without writing a new comment. The /NOKILL
- option is used in combination with the /SHOW
- option.
-
- /ADD
- This option allows the user to write a
- comment to the next user.
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 23
-
- /nn
- Number of lines that the user comment will
- be. Normally this is around 5 lines. When no
- number is given, Concord defaults to 2
- lines.
-
- Menu number : $0017
- Menu name : MENU_USERVFILE
- Description : This menu option is used to check if the
- file defined in the userrecord VIEWFILE
- option is displayed or not. If the setting
- USER_VIEWED or the setting USER_VIEWONLYONCE
- are false, the file defined in the current
- userrecord is shown. If the setting in the
- USER_DELAFTERVIEW field is true, Concord
- deletes the file, otherwise it leaves the
- file as it is.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number $0018 is not available for use.
-
- Menu number : $0019
- Menu name : MENU_REDRAW
- Description : This menu option allows you to redraw the
- screen. Normally screen redraws are on,
- except for menu type 7, where it is off by
- default. This menu command allows you to
- turn screenredraws on or off for a certain
- menu option. This menu command does nothing
- on it's own, but should be used in
- combination with another menu command, but
- with the same execute key. Here's an
- example:
-
- Z Z MENU_EDIT OFFLINEFORMAT
- Z Z MENU_REDRAW /YES
-
- The option can also be used to turn
- screenredraws off on certain menu commands.
- Data syntax : [/Yes] [/No]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /Yes
- Turn screenredraws on for this menu option
- only.
-
- /No
- Turn screenredraws off for this menu option
- only.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 24
-
- Menu number : $001A
- Menu number : MENU_RUNFORM
- Description : Concord allows you to use a form to enter
- information. A form is a predefined screen
- where you can set areas where information is
- entered. Every form needs a control file,
- which has the extension FRM. See the chapter
- on text and control files for more
- information about forms.
- Data syntax : <formname>
- Mandatory data : Name of the form file to use.
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu option : $001B
- Menu option : MENU_CMDLINE
- Description : This menu command enters commandline mode
- for the duration of one single commandline.
- Normally when hotkeys are active, you can
- only press one key and the command is
- executed. But sometimes it might be
- necessary to enter more than one option.
- This can be done by using this menu option,
- which will turn hotkeys off and make it a
- commandline system until ENTER is pressed.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $001C
- Menu name : MENU_NODEFMENU
- Description : When there is a menu called INCLUDE.MNU, the
- menu options in this menu are added to every
- menu in Concord. This allows you to place
- options which should be available everywhere
- to the user in this menu. Sometimes it might
- be necessary that this menu is not used and
- to allow this, menu option 1C has been
- defined. This will force Concord not to use
- the INCLUDE.MNU file if it is found. Use
- this menu command as an automatic menu
- option.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- | Menu number : $001D
- | Menu name : MENU_MNODECHAT
- | Description : Menu to start the multi node chat. If you
- | run a BBS with more than 1 line, you can
- | have your users chat with each other.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 25
-
- | Menu number : $001E
- | Menu name : MENU_SBBS_Q_A
- | Description : This menu command let's you run your old
- | SuperBBS Q-A files. Please note that not
- | options from SuperBBS are supported and that
- | the scriptfile language from Concord is far
- | more powerful.
- | Data syntax : <Filename>
- | Mandatory data : Name of the Q-A file to execute.
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $001F
- | Menu name : MENU_APHORISM
- | Description : This menu command allows you to display a
- | fortune cookie to your users. Concord uses
- | a file to read the cookies from and displays
- | them randomly.
- | Data syntax : <Filename>
- | Mandatory data : Name of the aphorism file. This file should
- | have the following format:
- |
- | 3
- | Aphorism1
- |
- | Aphorism2
- |
- | Aphorism3
- |
- | Each aphorism is separated with 1 empty line
- | from the other. The number on the first line
- | is the number of aphorism in your file. This
- | number is optional. When used it speeds up
- | the search in the file, because Concord does
- | not have to read in the whole file before
- | selecting an aphorism.
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $0020
- | Menu name : MENU_WRITELOG
- | Description : Menu option to write a textline in the
- | Concord logfile.
- | Data syntax : <Textline>
- | Mandatory data : The line to be written in the logfile.
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $0021
- | Menu name : MENU_AGESTAT
- | Description : This menu command generates a statistics
- | screen of your users age.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 26
-
- | Menu number : $0022
- | Menu name : MENU_WRITE
- | Description : Menu command to write a textline on screen.
- | This could be used to write a prompt on
- | screen underneath your menus.
- | Data syntax : <Textline>
- | Mandatory data : Textline to display on screen.
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $0023
- | Menu name : MENU_VOTE
- | Description : Concord has a build in voting system where
- | users can add questions and other users can
- | vote on those questions. This menu option
- | allows your users to vote on the existing
- | questions.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $0024
- | Menu name : MENU_ADDVOTE
- | Description : Menu option to add a vote to the voting
- | system. This menu option is for creating the
- | vote questions, menu option 23 is for voting
- | on the questions.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $0025
- | Menu name : MENU_QUIT
- | Description : Menu option which can be used as a remark
- | line in a menu file. It will not be shown to
- | the user. See this menu option as the REM
- | option from DOS.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $1000
- Menu name : MENU_FILELIST
- Description : This menu option lists the files in the file
- area. It will display the filelist so the
- user can see what is available on your
- system.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] [/N<MM-DD-YY> [<filemask>] [<keyword>]
- Mandatory data : When there is no option entered, Concord
- will display the files in the current area
- only starting from top to bottom as defined
- in the FILES.BBS file or the filebase file.
- Extra options : /ALL
- All files areas are checked for a match.
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 27
-
- /N<MM-DD-YY>
- Display only files in the current area that
- are newer than the date specified. The date
- is in the format:
-
- MM Month
- DD Day
- YY Year
-
- You can use a scriptfile to ask for the
- date.
-
- <filemask>
- Display only files in the current area that
- match the given search criteria. You can use
- a scriptfile to ask for the filemask to
- search for. All normal DOS wildcards, like
- * and ?, can be used.
-
- <keyword>
- Display only files in the current area that
- match the given search criteria. You can use
- a scriptfile to ask for the keyword to
- search for.
-
- Menu number : $1001
- Menu name : MENU_NEWFILES
- Description : Display new files since the last time the
- user was on, or since the date specified by
- the user.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] [<MM-DD-YY>]
- Mandatory data : When no optional data is entered, Concord
- displays the new files in the current area.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Display the new files in all available
- areas, starting at area 1.
-
- <MM-DD-YY>
- Specifies the date to start the search for
- new files on. Normally this is the date the
- user was on your system for the last time.
- Concord displays a question with this last
- access date as default entered in the answer
- field. The user can change this if he/she
- wants to. If for any reason you would want
- to display a newfiles list with a different
- date, you can use this option. The date is
- in the format:
-
- MM (= Month) - DD (= Day) - YY (= Year)
-
- You can also use a scriptfile to ask for the
- date.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 28
-
- Menu number : $1002
- Menu name : MENU_FILEMASK
- Description : Menu option to search for a file in your
- filebase with a given filemask. The filemask
- can contain any valid DOS wildcards like *
- and ?.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] <filemask>
- Mandatory data : <Filemask>
- Filemask to search for in the filebase. This
- option is searching in the current file area
- only.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Normally the search is done only in the
- current file area. When the /ALL option is
- used every available area is used for the
- search.
-
- Menu number : $1003
- Menu name : MENU_KEYWORD
- Description : Menu option to search for a word in your
- filebase with a given keyword. The keyword
- can be any valid DOS character(s).
- Data syntax : [/ALL] <keyword>
- Mandatory data : <keyword>
- Keyword to search for in the filebase. This
- option is searching in the current file area
- only. Found keywords will be highlighted.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Normally the search is done only in the
- current file area. When the /ALL option is
- used every available area is used for the
- search.
-
- Menu number : $1004
- Menu name : MENU_PREVFAREA
- Description : Menu command to change the current file area
- to the previous one. If the current area is
- the first area, the last area is used as the
- area to jump to. An example:
-
- -- 1 <--- 2 <--- 3 <--- 4 <--- 5 <--- 6 <--
- | |
- -------------------------------------------
- | Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMB] [/GROUP=xxx]
- | Mandatory data : The options on this menu command allows you
- | to change area within all areas, the
- | combined areas or within a certain group.
- | Extra options : /ALL
- | Use all groups for area change.
- |
- | /COMB
- | Use only areas active as combined areas in
- | the area change.
- | >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 29
-
- | /GROUP=xxx
- | Use only areas that belong to group xxx as
- | the areas to do the area change in. You can
- | use this one in combination with the
- | previous two commands.
-
- Menu number : $1005
- Menu name : MENU_NEXTFAREA
- Description : Menu command to change the current file area
- to the next one. If the current area is the
- last area, the first area is used as the
- area to jump to. An example:
-
- -> 1 ---> 2 ---> 3 ---> 4 ---> 5 ---> 6 ---
- | |
- -------------------------------------------
- | Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMB] [/GROUP=xxx]
- | Mandatory data : Use only one option at a time, unless you
- | use the /GROUP option.
- | Extra options : /ALL
- | Use all groups for area change.
- |
- | /COMB
- | Use only areas active as combined areas in
- | the area change.
- |
- | /GROUP=xxx
- | Use only areas that belong to group xxx as
- | the areas to do the area change in. This
- | command can be used in combination with the
- | previous two commands.
-
- Menu number : $1006
- Menu name : MENU_SELFAREA
- Description : Menu command to change the file area.
- Concord will display a list of file areas to
- select from, unless the file FILEAREA.ANS is
- found.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMBINED] [/NAME=<name>,<name>...]
- [/GROUP=<group>,<group>...] [/NONE]
- [/RANGE=<from>..<to>,...]
- Mandatory data : At least one of the extra option needs to be
- specified.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Displays the selection screen with all
- available areas. Only areas that match the
- security of the user will be displayed.
-
- /COMBINED
- Displays the selection screen with all
- combined areas. This can vary per user,
- since the user has the option to turn areas
- on or off.
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 30
-
- /NAME=<name>,<name>...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that match the name(s) entered on the
- command line. Note that you can use the
- Concord macros in this and other fields of
- the menus.
-
- /GROUP=<group>,<group>...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- belonging to the groups entered on the
- command line. This allows you to change area
- within a group.
-
- /NONE
-
- /RANGE=<from>..<to>,...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that are within the range specified on the
- command line.
-
- Menu number : $1007
- Menu name : MENU_VIEWFILE
- Description : View a file that is in the filelist. This
- menu option allows you to view a file. If
- the file is an archive, the archive contents
- is shown. If the file is a textfile, the
- text is shown. If the file is something
- else, a list in hex is displayed.
-
- Locally you can define how Concord will
- react to a certain file by defining it in
- the ASCII file VIEW.CTL. Here you can
- specify which viewer to load for GIF files,
- JPG files, MOD files etc. See the example
- file included in the Concord archive.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] <filename>
- Mandatory data : <filename>
- Name of the file to be viewed.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Search for a match in all available areas.
- Normally this option only works for the
- current directory.
-
- Menu number : $1008
- Menu name : MENU_TMPUNPACK
- Description : Menu command to extract or copy files to the
- TEMP directory. this allows your users to
- unpack an archived file and extract some
- files, view files inside the archive or re-
- archive it in another format. This command
- works for files in the current area.
- Data syntax : [<unpackfile>] [/?] [<filestounpack>]
- Mandatory data : None
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 31
-
- Extra options : <unpackfile>
- Name of the file to unpack. Normally, when
- no optional data is given, Concord will ask
- the user which file to unpack to the TEMP
- directory.
-
- /?
- Displays the contents of a file that is to
- be unpacked to the TEMP directory.
-
- <filestounpack>
- Name of the file(s) to unpack from the main
- archive. Normally when no optional data is
- given, Concord asks the user which files
- need to be unpacked from the archive.
-
- Menu number : $1009
- Menu name : MENU_TMPPACK
- Description : Menu command to pack files in the TEMP
- directory.
- Data syntax : [<packintofile>] [/?] [<filestopack>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <packintofile>
- Name of the new archive that Concord is
- about to create. Normally when no optional
- data is given, Concord will ask which file
- name to use.
-
- /?
- Displays the files to be packed in the TEMP
- directory.
-
- <filestopack>
- Name of the file(s) to pack into the new
- archive. Normally, when no optional data is
- entered, Concord will ask the user which
- files to include.
-
- Menu number : $100A
- Menu name : MENU_TMPCOPY
- Description : Menu command that is used to copy a file to
- the TEMP directory. Please note the
- difference with menu option 1008. Option
- 1008 is used to extract files to the TEMP
- directory, 100A is used to copy files to the
- TEMP directory.
- Data syntax : [<copyfilemask>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <copyfilemask>
- Name of the file(s) to copy to the TEMP
- directory. If no optional data is supplied,
- Concord will ask the user which file to copy
- to the TEMP directory.
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 32
-
- Menu number : $100B
- Menu name : MENU_TMPLIST
- Description : Menu command to list the files in the TEMP
- directory.
- Data syntax : [<filemask>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <filemask>
- Defines the filemask that Concord will use
- to display the files in the TEMP directory.
- All normal DOS wildcards can be used. When
- no optional data is specified, Concord will
- show all files.
-
- Menu number : $100C
- Menu name : MENU_TMPKILL
- Description : This option allows you to remove files from
- the TEMP directory.
- Data syntax : [<filemask>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <filemask>
- Name or filemask of the file(s) to remove
- from the TEMP directory. When no optional
- data is given, Concord will ask which
- file(s) to remove.
-
- Menu number : $100D
- Menu name : MENU_TMPVIEW
- Description : View a file that is in the TEMP directory.
- If the file is an archive, the archive
- contents is shown. If the file is a
- textfile, the text is shown. If the file is
- something else, a list in hex is displayed.
- Data syntax : [<filemask>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <filemask>
- Name or filemask of the file(s) to view.
- When no optional data is entered, Concord
- will ask the user for the filename(s).
-
- Menu number : $100E
- Menu name : MENU_MOVEFILE
- Description : Menu command that allows you to move a file
- to another area.
- Data syntax : [<movefilemask>] [<destarea: see menu 1006>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <movefilemask>
- Name or filemask of the file(s) to move.
- When no optional data is entered, Concord
- will ask for the filename(s) to move.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 33
-
- <destarea: see menu 1006>
- Area to move the files to. See menu command
- 1006 for the options available. When no
- optional data is entered, Concord will ask
- to which directory to move the file.
-
- Menu number : $100F
- Menu name : MENU_CHECKFLAG
- Description : Menu command to edit the list of tagged
- files. This allows the user to delete files
- from the list of tagged files and to view
- which files are tagged.
- Data syntax : [/ALL]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /ALL
- Display the tagged files from ALL available
- areas. Normally Concord only shows the
- tagged files that are in the current area.
-
- Menu number : $1010
- Menu name : MENU_UPLOAD
- Description : Menu command used to upload files to your
- system. The file will be placed in the area
- defined in the configuration file.
- Data syntax : [<directory>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : <directory>
- Normally Concord places the file in the
- directory specified in the upload settings
- of the file area configuration. You can
- override this setting by using an upload
- path on the optional data field.
-
- Menu number : $1011
- Menu name : MENU_DOWNLOAD
- Description : This option allows your users to download
- files from the system.
- Data syntax : [/TEMP] [/ALL] [<filename>]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /TEMP
- This option allows the download of files
- from the TEMP directory. Use this in your
- menu with the other TEMP menu commands.
-
- /ALL
- Option to tell Concord to allow downloads
- from all areas the user has access to.
- Normally files can be downloaded from the
- current area only.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 34
-
- <Filename>
- If you want your users to download a
- specific file, enter the filename in the
- optional data field. This allows the
- downloading of a specific file. Full path
- and filename must be used.
-
- Menu number : $1012
- Menu name : MENU_SETFAREAS
- Description : This allows you to set file areas as
- 'combined' areas.
- Data syntax : [num[..num]] [[*]string[*]] [ALL] [ON] [OFF]
- Mandatory data : One of the extra options needs to be defined
- followed by the ON or OFF option. These two
- options are not used alone.
- Extra options : num[..num]
- Toggle areas between two given file area
- numbers on or off depending on the following
- keyword.
-
- [*]string[*]
- Toggle areas that comply with the given
- string on or off depending on the keyword
- that follows this option. If you use the
- string alone, every area that matches will
- be used. If you use the *, it is either all
- areas that have their name starting or
- ending with the given string that are used.
- For example when the string is *OW all areas
- called WINDOWS will be used.
-
- ALL
- Turn all areas on or off.
-
- Menu number : $1013
- Menu name : MENU_DL_FLIST
- Description : Download new files list.
- | Data syntax : <filename> [/PACK]
- Mandatory data : Name of the filelist.
- | Extra options : /PACK
- | Pack the newfiles list before downloading.
-
- | Menu number : $1014
- | Menu name : MENU_TMPCOPYTAG
- | Description : Copy the tagged files to the TEMP directory.
- | This will copy all files that the user
- | tagged to the TEMP directory, so the user
- | can perform the available actions on the
- | file(s).
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 35
-
- | Menu number : $1015
- | Menu name : MENU_CHKFATTACH
- | Description : Menu command to check if there are any file-
- | attach files waiting for the user.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $1016
- | Menu name : MENU_ATTACHFILE
- | Description : Menu option that allows your users to send
- | file to other users on your system. This
- | option is turning your system into a real
- | mailbox where users cannot only send
- | messages to other users, but also attach
- | files to the messages. The addressee must be
- | present in your userlist. The files are
- | stored in the directory specified in the
- | configuration + the CRC-32 code of the
- | capitalized user name.
- | Data syntax : [<whoto>]
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : /Whoto
- | Name of the user that the file attach is
- | for. The user must be present in the
- | userlist.
- |
- | Menu number : $1017
- | Menu name : MENU_KILLATTACH
- | Description : Option to remove file(s) from the file
- | attach.
- | Data syntax : [<Filemask>]
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : <Filemask>
- | Name or filemask of the file(s) to remove
- | from the file attach.
-
- Menu number : $2004
- Menu name : MENU_PREVMAREA
- Description : See menu command 1004, except that in this
- case it works for the mail areas.
- | Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMB] [/GROUP=xxx] [/PKT] [/MAIL]
- | Mandatory data : The options on this menu command allows you
- | to change area within all areas, the
- | combined areas or within a certain group.
- | Use only one option at a time, unless it is
- | the /GROUP option.
- | Extra options : /ALL
- | Use all groups for area change.
- |
- | /COMB
- | Use only areas active as combined areas in
- | the area change.
- | >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 36
-
- | /GROUP=xxx
- | Use only areas that belong to group xxx as
- | the areas to do the area change in. This
- | command in be used in combination with the
- | other commands.
- |
- | /PKT
- | Use only areas selected for the QWK system
- | as areas to change to.
- |
- | /MAIL
- | Change to previous area with mail checkflag
- | on.
-
- Menu number : $2005
- Menu name : MENU_NEXTMAREA
- Description : See menu command 1005, except that in this
- case it works for the mail areas.
- | Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMB] [/GROUP=xxx] [/PKT] [/MAIL]
- | Mandatory data : Use only one option at a time, unless it is
- | the /GROUP option.
- | Extra options : /ALL
- | Use all groups for area change.
- |
- | /COMB
- | Use only areas active as combined areas in
- | the area change.
- |
- | /GROUP=xxx
- | Use only areas that belong to group xxx as
- | the areas to do the area change in. This
- | command can be used in combination with the
- | other options.
- |
- | /PKT
- | Use only areas selected for the QWK system
- | as areas to change to.
- |
- | /MAIL
- | Change to next mail area with mail check
- | flag on.
-
- Menu number : $2006
- Menu name : MENU_SELMAREA
- Description : Menu command to change the mail area.
- Concord will display a list of mail areas to
- select from, unless the file MAILEAREA.ANS
- is found.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] [/COMBINED] [/NAME=<name>,<name>...]
- [/GROUP=<group>,<group>...] [/NONE]
- [/RANGE=<from>..<to>,...] [/ECHO] [/NET]
- [/LOCAL] [/NEW] [/MSGS]
- Mandatory data : At least one of the extra option needs to be
- specified.
- >> Continued >>
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 37
-
- Extra options : /ALL
- Displays the selection screen with all
- available areas. Only areas that match the
- security of the user will be displayed.
-
- /COMBINED
- Displays the selection screen with all
- combined areas. This can vary per user,
- since the user has the option to turn areas
- on or off.
-
- /NAME=<name>,<name>...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that match the name(s) entered on the
- command line. Note that you can use the
- Concord macros in this and other fields of
- the menus.
-
- /GROUP=<group>,<group>...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- belonging to the groups entered on the
- command line. This allows you to change area
- within a group.
-
- /NONE
-
- /RANGE=<from>..<to>,...
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that are within the range specified on the
- command line.
-
- /ECHO
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that are configured as echomail areas.
-
- /NET
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that are configured as netmail areas.
-
- /LOCAL
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that are defined as local mail areas.
-
- /NEW
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that have new mail in them.
-
- /MSGS
- Displays the selection screen with all areas
- that have messages in them.
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 38
-
- Menu number : $2007
- Menu name : MENU_SCANMSGS
- Description : Menu option to display a list of the
- messages in an area. Only the message
- number, sender, recipient and subject are
- shown.
- Data syntax : [/Fwd] [/Rev] [/New] [/Only:<numm>]
- [/Days:<numm>] [<searchstring>]
- Mandatory data : One of the options mentioned in the extra
- options. Only one option can be used at the
- same time.
- Extra options : /Fwd
- Display a list of messages in forward order,
- starting at the first message.
-
- /Rev
- Display a list of messages in reverse order
- starting at the last message. In this case
- only the last message is displayed. Press
- the Up Arrow or PgUp key for a list of
- messages before the last messages.
-
- /New
- Only display a list of new messages,
- starting at the first new message found in
- the area.
-
- /Only:<numm>
- Display a list of the number of messages
- from the last message that are given as
- <numm>. This is done in forward order.
-
- /Days:<numm>
- Display a list of messages which are younger
- than the number of days specified in <numm>.
- This is in forward order.
-
- <searchstring>
- String to search for in the message listing.
-
- Menu number : $2008
- Menu name : MENU_READMSGS
- Description : Menu command that enables you to read
- messages on the BBS system.
- Data syntax : [/Fwd] [/Rev] [/New] [/Only:<numm>]
- [/Days:<numm>] [/Jump:<numm>]
- Mandatory data : One of the options mentioned in the extra
- options. Only one option can be used at the
- same time.
- Extra options : /Fwd
- Read messages in forward order, starting at
- the first message.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 39
-
- /Rev
- Read messages in reverse order starting at
- the last message.
-
- /New
- Read new messages, starting at the first new
- message found in the area.
-
- /Only:<numm>
- Read messages from the last message that are
- given as <numm>. This is done in forward
- order.
-
- /Days:<numm>
- Read messages which are younger than the
- number of days specified in <numm>. This is
- in forward order.
-
- /Jump:<numm>
- Read the message defined in the <numm> field
- on the optional data line.
-
- Menu number : $2009
- Menu name : MENU_READCOMB
- Description : Menu command that enables you to read
- messages on the BBS system. The difference
- between this command and menu 2008 is that
- this command works over the combined areas.
- Concord will see all combined areas as one
- big area and act accordingly. Users can
- toggle combined areas on or off in the area
- selection screen.
- Data syntax : [/Fwd] [/Rev] [/New] [/Only:<numm>]
- [/Days:<numm>] [/Jump:<numm>]
- Mandatory data : One of the options mentioned in the extra
- options. Only one option can be used at the
- same time.
- Extra options : /Fwd
- Read messages in forward order, starting at
- the first message.
-
- /Rev
- Read messages in reverse order starting at
- the last message.
-
- /New
- Read new messages, starting at the first new
- message found in the area.
-
- /Only:<numm>
- Read messages from the last message that are
- given as <numm>. This is done in forward
- order.
- >> Continued >>
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 40
-
- /Days:<numm>
- Read messages which are younger than the
- number of days specified in <numm>. This is
- in forward order.
-
- /Jump:<numm>
- Read the message defined in the <numm> field
- on the optional data line.
-
- Menu number : $200A
- Menu name : MENU_WRITEMSG
- Description : Menu command that allows you and your users
- to write messages on the BBS. Concord will
- write the message in the current active area
- and will ask for the addressee and the
- subject unless the options below are used.
- If it is netmail, an Fidonet address will
- also be asked.
- Data syntax : [/T<Whoto>] [/S<Subject>] [/A<Area>]
- [/Reply]
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : /T<Whoto>
- Name of the addressee of the message. Useful
- if you want a message to the Sysop
- automatically addressed to yourself. Spaces
- are allowed in the name. No underscores are
- needed to separate different name parts.
-
- /S<Subject>
- Subject of the message, for example used for
- a logoff message. Mostly used in combination
- with the /T option. Spaces are allowed in
- the subject.
-
- /A<Area>
- Area number of the area the message is
- written in. Normally it is in the current
- area, but this allows you to define a
- different area.
-
- /Reply
- This means the new message is a reply.
-
- Menu number : $200B
- Menu name : MENU_SCANMAIL
- Description : Scan the message base for new personal mail
- and ask the user if he/she wants to read it.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 41
-
- Menu number : $200C
- Menu name : MENU_READMARK
- Description : Read messages previously marked while
- listing messages. When no messages are
- marked, this command is not doing anything.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $200D
- Menu name : MENU_OFFLINE
- Description : Download an offline mail packet. Concord
- will pack messages from the areas selected
- and place them in an offline mail packet in
- one of the four available formats, BlueWave,
- QWK, Omen or ASCII. Selecting message areas
- for this command is done in the mail area
- selection screen by pressing the P key, or
- whatever key you have defined. See the
- chapter on Offline mail packets for more
- information.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $200E
- Menu name : MENU_OFFLINE2
- Description : Upload an offline mail packet. Concord will
- unpack the mail packet and place the
- messages in the correct areas.
- Data syntax : None
- Mandatory data : None
- Extra options : None
-
- Menu number : $200F
- Menu name : MENU_SETMAREAS
- Description : This allows you to set mail areas as
- 'combined' areas.
- Data syntax : [num[..num]] [[*]string[*]] [LOCAL] [ECHO]
- [NET] [ALL] [ON] [OFF] [UNDO] [[NO]MAIL]
- [[NO]COMB] [CLEAR] [NEW] [ONLY:<Msgs>]
- [DAYS:<Days>] [MAX]
- Mandatory data : One of the extra options needs to be
- defined. Some of the extra options only work
- in conjunction with another option, like ON
- and OFF.
- Extra options : num[..num]
- Toggle areas between two given mail area
- numbers on or off depending on the keyword
- that follows this keyword.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 42
-
- [*]string[*]
- Toggle areas that comply with the given
- string on or off depending on the keyword
- that follows this option. If you use the
- string alone, every area that matches will
- be used. If you use the *, it is either all
- areas that have their name starting or
- ending with the given string that are used.
- For example when the string is *OW all areas
- called WINDOWS will be used.
-
- LOCAL
- Toggle LOCAL mail areas on or off, depending
- on the keyword that follows this keyword.
-
- ECHO
- Same as LOCAL, except now for Echomail areas.
-
- NET
- Same as local except now for areas that are
- defined as NETmail in the configuration.
-
- ALL
- Turn all areas on or off.
-
- ON
- Used in combination with one of the other
- commands. This turns the areas ON.
-
- OFF
- Same as ON, except turning the areas OFF.
-
- UNDO
- Not used at this moment by Concord.
-
- [NO]MAIL
- Turn mail scan on or off for the areas
- selected.
-
- [NO]COMB
- Turn combined areas on or off.
-
- CLEAR
- Clear all last read pointers in mail areas
- selected by one of the other options.
-
- NEW
- Set the lastreadpointers to the first new
- message in the areas selected by one of the
- other options.
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 43
-
- ONLY:<Msgs>
- Set the lastreadpointers to the number of
- messages specified in <Msgs> from the last
- message in the areas selected by one of the
- other options.
-
- DAYS:<Days>
- Set the lastreadpointers to the first
- message younger than the number of days
- specified in <Days> selected by one of the
- other options.
-
- MAX
- Set the last readpointer to the last number
- in the areas selected by one of the other
- options.
-
- | Menu number : $2010
- | Menu name : MENU_MAREASTAT
- | Description : Menu command to show information about your
- | mail areas. It shows the number of messages
- | in all available areas.
- | Data syntax : None
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : None
- |
- | Menu number : $2011
- | Menu name : MENU_WRITEMSG2
- | Description : Menu command to write messages using files.
- | The file, which must be an ASCII file, will
- | be imported into the message and can be
- | edited. Differences between this command and
- | menu $200A are that all user given
- | parameters are excluded. You will have to
- | enter all information on the menu
- | commandline. All optional commands from menu
- | $200A are valid with this menu command.
- | Data syntax : [/QUOTE:<Filename>] [/POST:<Filename>]
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : /QUOTE:<Filename>
- | File to import into the messagebase as a
- | quoted file. This means the > character is
- | placed before every line as if you quoted a
- | message.
- |
- | /POST:<Filename>
- | File to import into the messagebase.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 44
-
- Menu number : $3004
- Menu name : MENU_PREVDOOR
- Description : See menu command 1004, except that in this
- case it works for the doors defined in the
- configuration.
- | Data syntax : [/GROUP=xxx]
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : /GROUP=xxx
- | Change to the previous door in the selected
- | group.
-
- Menu number : $3005
- Menu name : MENU_NEXTDOOR
- Description : See menu command 1005, except that in this
- case it works for the doors defined in the
- configuration.
- | Data syntax : [/GROUP=xxx]
- | Mandatory data : None
- | Extra options : /GROUP=xxx
- | Change to the next door in the selected
- | group.
-
- Menu number : $3006
- Menu name : MENU_SELDOOR
- Description : Menu command to change the door. Concord
- will display a list of doors to select from.
- Data syntax : [/ALL] [/NAME=<name>,<name>...]
- [/GROUP=<group>,<group>...] [/NONE]
- [/RANGE=<from>..<to>,...]
- Mandatory data : At least one of the extra option needs to be
- specified.
- Extra options : /ALL
- Displays the selection screen with all
- available doors. Only doors that match the
- security of the user will be displayed.
-
- /NAME=<name>,<name>...
- Displays the selection screen with all doors
- that match the name(s) entered on the
- command line. Note that you can use the
- Concord macros in this and other fields of
- the menus.
-
- /GROUP=<group>,<group>...
- Displays the selection screen with all doors
- belonging to the groups entered on the
- command line. This allows you to change door
- within a group.
-
- /NONE
-
- >> Continued >>
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 45
-
- /RANGE=<from>..<to>,...
- Displays the selection screen with all doors
- that are within the range specified on the
- command line.
-
- And that is it for the menu options. Note that Concord is still
- under development and that new options will be available in the
- future.
-
- If you have any problems setting your menus up, have a look at
- the sample menus and if that does not help you, contact the
- Concord support sites or the support echomail area CONCORD.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
- Concord v0.01 Gamma 2 Chapter 4 - Page 46
-